JP6598332B1 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine having a display method is provided. A first display for prompting an operation for a first determination, a second display for prompting an operation for a second determination, and a third display after the determination for the first determination. When the first operation is performed in a state where the first display is displayed, the third display can be displayed and the first display is displayed. The second display can be started in the state. In the state in which the second display started after the first display is started and before the third display is displayed, the first display is displayed. Even if this operation is performed, the third display is not displayed. [Selection] Figure 107

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), a sealed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game table that performs display for prompting a determination operation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2005-296354 A

In a conventional game stand, it is possible to display a display prompting another determination operation while displaying a display prompting a determination operation in order to expand the fun of the game. There was room for consideration in processing.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a characteristic display method.

The gaming table according to the present invention includes operation means, control means for shifting to any one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state, and display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. The game table is configured to be able to notify the operation information of the operation means, and the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as “operation navigation”). The operation navigation is a navigation for pushing order, and includes a first counter related to the advantageous state, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (Hereinafter referred to as “first count value”) is configured to be updatable, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied. A termination Is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value reaches a specific value, and is configured to be able to transition to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states in the advantageous state, One advantageous gaming state is a first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed, and the first advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state. A second counter relating to the gaming state is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as “second count value”) can be updated every time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state. The second count value is configured to be updatable even when a game that is not won in the push order in the first advantageous gaming state is played, and the game medium The number of bets on the first is the first number And a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number, the second number being different from the first number, In the state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and one of the plurality of types of display includes a display including an image showing a certain value ( Hereinafter, one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as “second display”). The certain value is a value related to the second count value, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the execution of the first game is performed. Is started, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are The second display is configured to be displayed and updated in the first game, and after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the second game is executed. When started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game. It is configured so that a certain profit can be granted when a certain profit granting condition is satisfied, and the certain profit granting condition can be satisfied in the execution of the first game in the advantageous state The gaming machine is configured such that the certain profit granting condition is not satisfied in the execution of the second game in the advantageous state .
In addition, the gaming table according to the present invention includes an operation unit, a game state setting unit capable of setting one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state, and a display capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. And a notifying means capable of notifying operation information of the operating means, an advantageous gaming state control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state, and a first counter relating to the advantageous state And a plurality of counters including a second counter, and a plurality of bets including a first bet number and a second bet number less than the first bet number to start one game. Bet number setting means capable of setting any bet number, and profit granting means capable of giving a certain profit when a certain profit granting condition is satisfied, wherein the advantageous state includes the operation information Regarding notification (hereinafter referred to as “operation navigation”) The operation navigation is navigation for pushing order, and in the advantageous state, a game based on the first bet number (hereinafter referred to as “first game”). ) Is a game that is more advantageous to the player than the game based on the second bet number (hereinafter referred to as “second game”), and the advantageous game state control means performs one game in the advantageous state. Each time it is played, it is a means capable of executing control to update the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as “first count value”), and the gaming state setting means satisfies a certain end condition. In this case, the setting of the advantageous state is terminated and the normal state can be set, and the certain termination condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value. The advantageous gaming state control means In the advantageous state, it is possible to execute control for setting any advantageous gaming state among a plurality of advantageous gaming states including the first advantageous gaming state, and one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state. Each time it is played, it is a means capable of executing control to update the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as “second count value”). The second count value is configured to be updatable even in the case of a game that is an executable game state that can be executed and is not elected to push forward in the first advantageous game state. The display means includes a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter referred to as a “first display”) as one of the plurality of types of displays, and after the certain value is updated. Display including an image representing the value (hereinafter referred to as “ This is called “second display”. ), The certain value is a value relating to the second count value, and the first game is displayed after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state. When the execution of is started, both the first count value and the second count value are updated by the advantageous game state control means, and the display means in the first game When the second display is configured to be displayable and the execution of the second game is started, the advantageous game state control means causes the first count value and the second count value to be Only the first count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed by the display means in the second game. In the execution of the first game in the advantageous state, A gaming machine configured such that a certain profit granting condition can be established, and configured so that the certain profit granting condition is not satisfied in the execution of the second game in the advantageous state. .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a characteristic display method.

FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an appearance of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention. It is a front view of the state which opened the front door of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. (A) It is a figure which expand | deploys and shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol given to each reel of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention planarly. (B) It is a figure which shows the winning line of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the kind of winning combination (including an operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in a three-sheet betting game. (B) It is a figure which shows the kind of winning combination (including an operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in the two betting game. (A) A transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. FIG. 4B is a transition diagram of the AT gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. FIG. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery process of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the pushing order of the slot machine which concerns on Embodiment 1 of this invention. It is the figure which matched the lighting mode of display data and the number-of-payout indicator 127. (A) The image of the production table with which the 1st sub control part 400 is provided is illustrated. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the judgment state production table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the LMT state production table. (D) is the figure which showed the modification of the LMT state production table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the bet number setting / start operation reception process of step S102 of FIG. (B) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process of step S201 of Fig.14 (a). (A) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the production state control process A of step S106 of FIG. (B) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of every game common process of step S401 of Fig.15 (a). (A) It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the low navigation state process A of step S404 of Fig.17 (a). It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state process A of step S405 of Fig.15 (a). It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state common process A of step S801 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the normal state process A of step S803 of FIG. 17 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the fixed notification state process A of step S805 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of AT1 state process A of step S807 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the judgment state process A of FIG.17 S809. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the AT2 state process A of step S811 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the withdrawal state process A of step S813 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process of step S814 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the production | presentation state control process B of step S113 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state process B of step S1704 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the normal state process B of step S1802 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the fixed notification state process B of step S1804 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of AT1 state process B of step S1806 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the judgment state process B of step S1808 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of AT2 state process B of step S1810 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the withdrawal state process B of step S1812 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the LMT state process B of step S1813 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows in detail the flow of the high navigation state completion | finish process of step S114 of FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing in detail a flow of normal state processing A according to Modification 1. 12 is a flowchart showing in detail a flow of normal state processing A according to Modification 2. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the fixed notification state process A which concerns on the modification 1 in detail. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the fixed notification state process A which concerns on the modification 2 in detail. 12 is a flowchart showing in detail a flow of a fixed notification state process A according to Modification 3. 12 is a flowchart showing in detail a flow of a fixed notification state process B according to Modification 3. It is a figure which shows the kind of winning combination (including an operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. (A) It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. (B), (c) It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the AT system of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention. (A) It is a figure which shows the lottery table used for the internal lottery process of a winning combination. (B) It is a figure explaining the correct operation order of the push order of this embodiment. It is the figure which matched the lighting mode of display data and the number-of-payout indicator 127. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to the main control part main process which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production | presentation state control process A which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to the production | presentation state control process A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown to Fig.15 (a). (B) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of every game common process which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to every game common process which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG.15 (b). It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state process A which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to the high navigation state process A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a flow of a rendering process according to a modification of the first embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the production | presentation state control process B which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to the production | presentation state control process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the high navigation state process B which concerns on the modification of Embodiment 1, and is a figure corresponding to the high navigation state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in FIG. In the high navigation state, when the performance state shifts in the order of AT2 state → judgment state → LMT state (limit state) and then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state, the counter of the time when only three betting games are performed It is the figure which showed an example of the update display. In the high navigation state, when the production state transitions in the order of AT2 state → judgment state → LMT state (limit state) and then transitions to the normal state of the low navigation state, both the three betting game and the two betting game are It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter when performed. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of a counter when a judgment effect is not performed by 2 betting games. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of a counter when a judgment effect and an ED effect are not performed by 2 betting games. In the high navigation state, when the performance state transitions in the order of the judgment state → LMT state (limit state) and then transitions to the normal state of the low navigation state, the ED effect and the freeze effect when only three betting games are performed It is the figure which showed an example. (A) In the high navigation state, when the production state transitions in the order of the judgment state → LMT state (limit state) and then transitions to the normal state of the low navigation state, a 3-stake bet game and a 2-stake bet game were performed. It is the figure which showed an example of ED production and freeze production of time. It is the figure which showed the modification of the setting suggestion production demonstrated using Fig.56 (a). It is the figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion effect when 2 betting games are continued in the judgment state of a high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd freezing effect at the time of performing 3 betting games. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the 2nd freeze effect at the time of performing two betting games in the middle of AT2 state. It is the figure which showed an example of ED production in the case of performing 3 betting games. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the ED effect in the case where it transfers to a LMT state after performing 2 betting games in a normal state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of ED effect in the case of continuing 2 betting games in a normal state. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of ED production performed after BB game. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of ED production performed during internal winning of BB. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production in case an interlocking production progresses normally. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the production in case an interlocking production does not advance normally. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect in case an ED effect is started, without an interlocking effect progressing normally. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the interlocking production in the case of continuing 2 betting games in the judge state. It is the figure which showed the interlocking production and its modification. (A) is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect when a 3 betting game was performed when the effect state shifted from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation when two betting games were performed when the production | presentation state shifted from the AT2 state to the judgment state in the high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification of the flow of the effect when a 3 betting game is performed when the production state shifts from the AT2 state to the judgment state in the high navigation state. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification of the flow of the production | presentation when two betting games are performed when the production | presentation state transfers to a judge state from an AT2 state in a high navigation state. It is the figure which showed the specific example of the flow of the production including a specific display. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation in case a 3 game | game is performed in a high navigation state, reaches | attains a ceiling, and the production | presentation state transfers in order of a normal state-> decision notification state-> AT1 state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation in case a 2 betting game is performed in a high navigation state, the ceiling state is not reached, and an effect state is maintained in a normal state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation in case a 3 state game and a 2 betting game are performed in a high navigation state, reach | attain a ceiling, and an effect state shifts in order of a normal state-> fixed notification state-> AT1 state. . It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation in case a 3 game and a 2 betting game are performed in a high navigation state, and it transfers to a LMT state, without reaching a ceiling. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation in the case where a 3 game and a 2 betting game are performed in a high navigation state, and it shifts to a low navigation state without reaching the ceiling. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation in case a 3 game and a 2 betting game are performed in the fixed notification state of a high navigation state, and a promotion counter is not updated. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect in case operation navigation is not performed in the fixed notification state of a high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the effect in case AT1 classification is promoted in the fixed notification state of a high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation when not reaching a ceiling in the fixed notification state of a high navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of the flow of the production | presentation at the time of reaching | attaining a ceiling in the fixed notification state of a high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of ED production in case 3 betting games were performed in the LMT state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of ED effect when two betting games were performed in the LMT state. It is the figure which showed the modification of the specific display shown to FIG. 67 (D). It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-1. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-2. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-3. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-4. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-5. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-6. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-7. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-8. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 1-9. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state process A which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is a figure corresponding to AT2 state process A which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in the said FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the judgment state process B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is a figure corresponding to the judgment state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in the said FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the AT2 initial frequency lottery table. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of the lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of AT2 state process B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is a figure corresponding to AT2 state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in the said FIG. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the pullback state process B which concerns on Embodiment 2, and is a figure corresponding to the pullback state process B which concerns on Embodiment 1 shown in the said FIG. (B) It is the figure which showed the example of a transition of AT state in a high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of changing to the normal state of a low navigation state, after the effect state changed in order of AT2 state-> judge state-> pull-back state in the high navigation state. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of changing to the normal state of a low navigation state, after the effect state changed in order of AT2 state-> LMT state in the high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of transition in order of AT2 state-> judge state-> pullback state-> AT2 state in the high navigation state, and the effect described with reference to FIG. The continuation is shown. (B) After the transition of the production state in the order of AT2 state → LMT state in the high navigation state, the state transitions to the normal state of the low navigation state, and again transitions to the high navigation state and the production state is the normal state → confirmed notification state → It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect at the time of transfer in order of AT1 state, and has shown the continuation of the effect demonstrated using FIG.92 (b). (A) It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting | reporting at the time of establishment of the combination in AT2 state. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of the alerting | reporting at the time of establishment of the combination in a LMT state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of correcting AT2 initial frequency. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of performing the display of the number of remaining games in AT2 state. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of performing the display of the number of remaining games in AT2 state. (A) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect in the case of displaying a result after transfer of AT2 state. (B) It is the figure which showed the flow of the effect when not displaying a result after completion | finish of AT2 state, and is a figure corresponding to Fig.95 (a). It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 2-1. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 2-2. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 2-3. It is the figure which showed the state transition of PUSH button operation, a cross key operation, throwing-in operation, and lever operation. (A) It is the figure which showed an example of various operation for switching the display of a normal screen and a demonstration screen in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed an example of various operation in the case of performing volume adjustment using a setting screen in time series. (C) It is the figure which showed an example of various operation in the case of performing volume adjustment, without displaying a setting screen. (D), (E) It is the figure which showed an example of other various operations in time series. It is the figure which showed the character selection operation in the time series when the production | presentation state transfers to the AT2 state from the judge state in the high navigation state. (A) It is the figure which showed Example 5 of character selection operation in the time series. (B) It is the figure which showed Example 6 of character selection operation in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed Example 7 of character selection operation in time series. (C) It is the figure which showed Example 8 of character selection operation in time series. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of character selection operation in time series. (B) It is the figure which showed the modification 2 of the character selection operation in time series. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 3-1. It is the figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 3-2.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
The slot machine of this embodiment starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instruction operation, whether or not the internal winning of a plurality of types of roles is determined by lottery, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the condition determined by the combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the reels are stopped matches a predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is ended. It is a game machine that advances a series of games that are terminated without being paid out.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of a game machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 110 to 112 are configured by attaching the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that displays a plurality of combinations of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. In this embodiment, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 100. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 113 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light projecting unit of this optical sensor. A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of the sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp indicating the winning line 114 that is valid.

  For example, the notification lamp 123 indicates to the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been won internally in a winning combination internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus confirmation. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be replayed (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of 3 cards are inserted, 2 when the bet button 131 is pressed, and 3 when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX (max) bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that the game can be started. The lamp 121 is turned on.

  The medal slot 141 is an slot for a player to insert a medal when starting a game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by the bet buttons 130 to 132, or an actual medal can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141. is there.

  The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals stored electronically in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display unit 125, the game information display unit 126, and the payout number display unit 127 are configured by a 7 segment (SEG) display unit. The payout number display device 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information related to the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

  The start lever 135 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 135 is referred to as a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating.

  Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel to be subjected to a second stop operation may be referred to as a second stop reel, and the reel to be subjected to a third stop operation may be referred to as a third stop reel.

  Further, the order of stopping the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation sequence for the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is referred to as “forward press operation sequence” or simply “forward press”, and the operation sequence for the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is “ This is called “reverse pressing operation sequence” or simply “reverse pressing”. Note that a light emitter may be provided in each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that is lit when the AT gaming state of the main control unit 300 is in a high navigation state to be described later. The player can grasp the high navigation state from the lighting state of the high navigation state lamp 190.

  The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is jammed. The payment button 134 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout exit 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  Below the stop button unit 136 is provided a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and pasting various types of certificate. At the lower part of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

  The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for exciting games. An effect device 160 is disposed above the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided above the effect device 160. The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 including two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened outward in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 100 (game). The structure appears on the person side).

  The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information related to the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

  In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. In the present embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may be a curved surface.

  Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by causing the lamp to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, the predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine with a full liquid crystal, it may be an area near the reels 110 to 112). Hereinafter, when it is described as lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high navigation state lamp 190, it is intended to include notification by another effect device (for example, a display device or the like) having the same function.

<Inside housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by the upper surface plate 261, the left side plate 260, the right side plate 260, the lower surface plate 264, and the back plate 242, and that opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores the main control board is disposed at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper portion of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are disposed below. A first sub-control board storage housing a first sub-control board constituting the first sub-control unit inside the main control board storage case 210 and the side plates 260 on the left side of the reels 110 to 112. A case 220 is provided. Further, an external concentrated terminal plate 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs the information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

  The lower surface plate 264 is provided with a medal payout device 180 (device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket), and has a power supply board above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and it is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

  The power supply device 252 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, and the like described later. Supply to the control unit and each device. Furthermore, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power source is cut off is provided. Yes.

  A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind this (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connecting portion for connecting a power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected thereto extends outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. Yes.

  The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and the liquid crystal display device 157 has an effect device 160 and an effect control board (not shown) for controlling the effect device 160. The upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals etc. on the medal tray 161, and the like. Yes. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be broadly divided into main effects according to a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. And a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in the internal lottery of a winning combination, and reel stop. ROM 306 for storing position, RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, frequency, etc. A WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312. The counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 at every interrupt time. In response to this interrupt request, the CPU 304 monitors each sensor and transmits a drive pulse. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47 ÷ 8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

  The main control unit 300 is activated when a power is turned on, and a random value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. The CPU 304 includes a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal). When the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main control unit main processing described later) To start).

  Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 inserts various sensors 318 (a bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, a bet button 132 sensor, and a medal insertion slot 141 every interruption time). Medal medal acceptance sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal medal payout sensor paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, The index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, etc.) are monitored.

  When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random value generation circuit 316. Receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random value used for the lottery.

  Two medal acceptance sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141 and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

  The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals stored electronically in the RAM 308 are inserted as inserted medals into the game. Detecting the case input operation. The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the medals stored electronically are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting a medal paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

  The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through L Become a level. When detecting this signal, the CPU 304 determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

  The main control unit 300 is provided in a drive circuit 322 for driving a stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving a solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 for driving the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion enable lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the display device 126, the payout number display device 127, and the high navigation state lamp 190) is provided.

  In addition, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted into an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a predetermined voltage value (this embodiment) In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives the control command transmitted from the main control unit 300 via the input interface and controls the entire first sub control unit 400 based on the control command. Yes. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, frequency, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, data for controlling the lighting pattern of the backlight, various displays, and the like are stored. Provided.

  The CPU 404 transmits the frequency division data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifiers and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with a command from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored. The audio data acquired from the ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422. The drive circuit 422 has various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input / output interface. 123).

  The first sub control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interruption time.

  In addition, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to the second sub control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and includes a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, frequency, and the like. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

  The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the interrupt request timing.

  The second sub control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Pattern arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is a figure which expand | deploys and shows the arrangement | sequence of the symbol given to each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) planarly.

  A plurality of types of symbols (eight types in the present embodiment) shown on the right side of the same figure are arranged on each reel 110 to 112 by a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in the present embodiment). Further, numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, “Bell design” is assigned to the 19th frame of the left reel 110, “Blank design” is assigned to the 19th frame of the middle reel 111, and “Seven 2” is assigned to the 18th frame of the right reel 112. The “design” is arranged. In the following, “Seven 1 symbol” may be referred to as “Blue 7 (symbol)”, and “Seven 2 symbol” may be referred to as “Red 7 (symbol)”.

<Prize line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4B shows a pay line of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention.

  The symbol displayed in the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is the upper stage symbol of the left reel 110 and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 2). The symbols displayed are the left reel middle symbol, the symbols displayed at the bottom of the left reel 110 (position 3 in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3), the symbols displayed on the left reel lower symbol, and the upper reel 111 (4 in the figure). The symbol displayed at the middle position of the middle reel 111, the symbol displayed at the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (also referred to as symbol position 5). The symbol displayed at the lower stage of the middle reel 111 (six position shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) is displayed at the lower stage of the middle reel and the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7). The upper right reel The symbol displayed in the middle stage of the right reel 112 (8 position shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 8) is the right reel middle stage symbol and the lower stage of the right reel 112 (9 position shown in the figure; also referred to as the symbol position 9). ) Are displayed as right reel lower symbols, and the symbols of each reel 110 to 112 are displayed in a total of nine on the reels 110 to 112 through the symbol display window 113 in the vertical direction. .

  In the present embodiment, one winning line 114 of the middle stage winning line L1 configured by the left reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 2), the middle reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 5) and the right reel middle stage symbol (symbol position 8) is provided. ing. The winning line 114 is a line that is set at a symbol stop position that is visible through the reel window 113, and corresponds to the winning combination described in FIGS. 5 (a) and 5 (b). It is a line for determining whether or not a combination is displayed. FIG. 4B shows the middle stage winning line L1. A valid pay line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

  The slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment can bet on three or two bets. When the number of inserted medals is less than two, any winning line is not effective, and three or two medals are available. The winning line L1 becomes effective when a bet is made. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

  Further, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle-stage winning line L1, the lower-right winning line composed of the upper left reel symbol, the middle reel middle symbol and the right reel lower symbol, the left reel lower symbol, the middle reel middle symbol and the right reel upper symbol. In other words, a total of three right-upward winning lines may be set as the effective winning lines 114, or the number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as the effective winning lines 114.

<Type of winning prize>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. The figure (a) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operations or payouts of each winning combination in the three betting game. (B) is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination in a two-sheet betting game.

  The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination (special combination 1, special combination 2) and a general combination (replay combination 1 to replay combination 13 and small combination 1 to small combination 5). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and can be arbitrarily adopted.

  Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the replaying role 1 to the replaying role 13 are roles that allow replaying without newly inserting medals. These winning combinations may be referred to as “acting combinations”. In addition, “winning” in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not accompany a medal payout (ie, does not accompany a medal payout) is displayed on the active line. The special combination 2 and the winnings for the re-playing role 1 to the re-playing role 13 are included.

  The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combinations) that shift to a special gaming state by winning. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the three betting game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the two betting game. No medal will be paid out for winning this role. In the corresponding symbol combination, the special combination 1 (BB1) is “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2”, and the special combination 2 (BB2) is “BAR-BAR-Seven 1”.

  When the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won internally, a special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internal winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the special winning 1 internal winning, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning 1 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the special winning 2 internal winning, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special winning 2 internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3). .

  This flag is kept on until winning the internal winning combination, and it becomes easy to win the internal winning combination in subsequent games. That is, even if the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won internally, even if the special combination is not won, the special combination will be in the internal winning state in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, special combination) In the case of winning an internal winning combination, the symbol combination “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)” will be in a state where it is easy to win. The special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

  The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or special combination 2. Further, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of games (110 wins by BB1 and 55 wins by BB2) are paid out in this special game state, a re-probability low probability state (hereinafter referred to as RT1). There is). The special game state (RT4) and the replay low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

  The “re-playing role (re-playing role 1 to re-playing role 13)” is a winning combination (operating role) that allows the player to play a game without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning, No medals will be paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are “replay-replay-replay” for replay player 1 (normal replay), “seven 1-seven 1-seven 1” for replay player 2 (direction replay 1), and replay role 3 (Production Replay 2) is as shown in FIG. 5 such as “Seven 1-Seven 2-Seven 1”.

  The “small role (small role 1 to small role 5)” is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combination is “ANY-Cherry-ANY”, where the small role 1 (Cherry) is small. The combination 2 (watermelon 1) is as shown in FIG. 5, such as “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. Also, the corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. In the case of “ANY-cherry-ANY”, the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be “cherry”, and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

<Reel stop control>
Next, an outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For the reel stop control, one of a plurality of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (for example, a result of an internal lottery process for a winning combination to be described later), and the selected reel stop control is performed. Based on control data.

  In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame slip control) is performed. With the pull-in control, the stop position of the reels 110 to 112 is shifted within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) (drawing range; here, a maximum of four frames) after each stop button 137 to 139 is operated by the player. Refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Each reel stop data includes a permissible control that allows a combination of symbols of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed on the winning line, and a prohibition control that does not display a combination of all winning combinations on the winning line. It is divided roughly.

  An example of the permissible control is, for example, when a winning combination is won internally, or when a special winning combination is being won internally (flag carryover), and when the player operates the stop buttons 137 to 139. Even if it is bad, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed together within the range of the number of frames. However, since it is only “permitted”, there are cases where the symbol combinations are not aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

  For example, when the small role 2 (watermelon 1) is won internally, the watermelon symbol is arranged over 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will be the winning line. Never stop.

  However, 100% may be arranged depending on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to replaying game 1 (normal replay) is a maximum of 4 frames, when replaying game 1 is won internally, 100% will be won regardless of the timing.

  On the other hand, an example in which prohibition control is performed is, for example, a case where the internal lottery result is lost, and the internal winning of the special role is not being performed (flag carryover), and the timing at which the player operates the stop buttons 137 to 139 Even if it is good, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are not displayed together within the range of the number of frames.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the type and transition of the gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described. FIG. 6A is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

  The main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 is roughly classified into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a replay high probability state special role 2 internal winning. It has a state (RT3) and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four gaming states are referred to as RT gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to a so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT gaming state), and according to the AT gaming state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub control unit 400 is configured to set a gaming state. The AT gaming state will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Note that the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability that the condition device relating to the replay combination will not operate (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), a special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability that the condition device relating to the re-playing role is activated varies with respect to the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 7A is a diagram illustrating a lottery table used for the internal lottery process of a winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each gaming state (RT gaming state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value for each winning combination.

  The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state to be described later is a random number obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data in a numerical range (for example, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each combination and lose is associated with each numerical range.

  It is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. This lottery data is provided with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probabilities of at least one combination are different, and a game shop clerk can arbitrarily select and set one of the set values. In addition, the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

  Hereinafter, the RT gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The replay low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest (unfavorable for the player) among other game states (for example, game states other than the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state There is also. In the replay low probability state, a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT1” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

  Among the winning combinations that are won internally in the low reprobability state, the special combination 1 (conditional device No. 1, only three betting games only), the special combination 2 (not shown, two betting games only), and the replaying combination 1 ( Conditional device No. 2), Re-playing players 2, 4-10 (Conditioning device No. 3), Re-playing roles 3, 4, 6, 8, 10-13 (Conditioning device No. 4) There is a role 5 (conditional devices No. 5 to 9). If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. The fact that the symbol combination related to winning in the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as “losing”. In addition, the fact that the winning combination has not been won may be expressed as “winning”.

  Here, “re-playing role 2, 4-10” means re-playing role 2, re-playing role 4, re-playing role 5, re-playing role 6, re-playing role 7, re-playing role 8, and re-playing role 9 , And that the re-game player 10 has won an internal winning at the same time. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with a correct operation sequence that is a predetermined operation sequence (in this example, when a stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player 2 is Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, according to the stop operation timing of each of the reels 110 to 112, replaying role 4, replaying role 5, replaying role 6, replaying role 7, replaying role 8, a symbol combination corresponding to any one of the re-gamer 9 and the re-gamer 10 is displayed on the winning line. Note that a combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as “re-playing combination 2, 4 to 10”, may be referred to as “push order”.

  Further, “re-playing role 3, 4, 6, 8, 10-13” means re-playing role 3, re-playing role 4, re-playing role 6, re-playing role 8, re-playing role 10, and re-playing role 11 , The re-game player 12 and the re-game player 13 indicate the internal winning at the same time. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with a correct operation sequence that is a predetermined operation sequence (in this example, when a stop operation is performed by reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the re-game player 3 is Displayed on the winning line, otherwise, according to the stop operation timing of each of the reels 110 to 112, replaying role 4, replaying role 6, replaying role 8, replaying role 10, replaying role 11, a combination of symbols corresponding to any one of the replaying combination 12 and the replaying combination 13 is displayed on the winning line.

  When “Pocket 4” is won internally, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 4 (bell) is displayed on the winning line is determined according to the player's operation order (FIG. 7 ( a) See remarks column). More specifically, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with a correct operation sequence that is a predetermined operation sequence, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out ( Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in accordance with the correct operation sequence, “bell-bell-bell” is not displayed on the winning line (losing).

  In addition, when “small role 4” is composed of “small role 4a” and “small role 4b” and “small role 4a” is internally elected, “bell-bell-bell” according to the operation order of the player. "" Is displayed on the pay line, while "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the pay line regardless of the operation sequence when "Pocket 4b" is won internally. You may comprise.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7B, the correct operation order of “small role 4” will be described in detail. There are six “small roles 4”, “small role 4 LCR”, “small role 4 LRC”, “small role 4 CLR”, “small role 4 CRL”, “small role 4 RLC”, and “small role 4 RCL”. The operation order of different correct answers is assigned to each of the subdivided “small roles 4”. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the “small roles 4” subdivided into six is the same.

  For example, when “small role 4 LCR” of “small role 4” is won internally, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. In addition, when “Small 4 CRL” of “Small 4” is won internally, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is a correct operation.

  FIG. 6A shows that when the special combination 1 is won internally (condition (A) is satisfied), the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later is entered. When the special combination 2 is won internally (when the condition (B) is satisfied), the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later is shown.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT2) and the special role 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as “special role internal winning state”) are the re-game low probability state (RT1). ) Is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-playing role is higher, and the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the special combination corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

  In the special winning 1 internal winning state (RT2), the winning combination for internal winning is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT2” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In RT3), a winning combination to be won internally is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT3” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combination that is won internally in the special role internal winning state includes re-playing part 1, re-playing part 2, 4-10, re-playing part 3, 4, 6, 8, 10-13, small part 1 to small part 4 There is. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. FIG. 6A shows a special game, which will be described later, when a symbol combination corresponding to special role 1 or special role 2 is displayed in a special role internal winning state (when condition (C) is satisfied). Transition to the state (RT4) is shown.

<Special gaming state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is a game state that is most advantageous to the player among all the game states. In the special game state, the winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT4” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. In the special game state, the winning combination for winning internally is only the small combination 5. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  FIG. 6A shows that in the special game state (RT4), when the specified number is paid out (when the condition (D) is satisfied), the state shifts to the re-game low probability state (RT1). ing. Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, if the game is paid out in excess of 110 medals, the re-game low probability state (RT1) Migrate to In addition, when the game state shifts to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 2, the game shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

  In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a specified number of payouts are executed. For example, the special game state ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, the game may be ended when there are 8 winnings or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 6 times) are played. That is, the condition (D) shown in FIG. 6A is not limited to this example.

<Transition of AT gaming state>
Next, an AT gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6B is a transition diagram of the AT gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100.

  The AT gaming state is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state, as shown in FIG. The low navigation state is a state where the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high navigation state is a state in which operation navigation is more likely to be executed than in the low navigation state, and is also referred to as an AT mode. Here, the operation navigation means that the push winning combination (in this example, the replaying role 2,4-10, the replaying role 3,4,6,8,10-13, or the small role 4) is won internally. In this case, it refers to the effect of informing the correct operation order. That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for medal acquisition, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state, or maintaining the advantageous game state.

  Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIG. 7B and FIG. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 7B is a view for explaining the correct operation sequence of the pressing order of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention, and FIG. 8 associates the display data with the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. It is a figure.

  For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is This is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

  Therefore, in the AT mode, when the “re-game player 2, 4 to 10” or “re-game player 3, 4, 6, 8, 10 to 13” is won internally, the first stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 03 suggesting that the first stop operation is right is selected, and a lighting mode corresponding to the display data 03 is displayed on the payout number display unit 127, and an effect image display is performed. The device 157 displays an image (for example, a letter “−−1”) indicating that the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

  The display data 04 is data indicating a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The display data 05 is the first stop reel. The data indicating the stop operation with the left reel 110, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 111, and display data 06 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel as the second stop reel. Data indicating a stop operation with the left reel 110 and the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and display data 07 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left. The display data 08 indicating the stop operation for the reel 110 includes the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third data. Data suggesting a stop operation with the stop reel as the middle reel 112, display data 09 is a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110. This suggests data.

  Therefore, in the AT mode, when the small winning 4 CLR of “small winning 4” is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 06 indicating that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the display data 06. The effect image display device 157 indicates that the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The image to be displayed (for example, “213” characters) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine whether the internal winning combination is a re-playing combination or a small combination 4 based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, it may be configured such that the correct stop operation of the small combination 4 is set to three choices as in the re-playing combination and the small combination 4 is also notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, it may be configured such that the correct game stop operation of the re-gamer is made into 6 choices as in the small role 4, and the re-gamer is also notified using the display data 04-09. Also in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

  In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is set to a state in which the operation navigation execution probability is low, and the high navigation state is set to a state in which the operation navigation execution probability is higher than the low navigation state. The state in which the navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When a stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation is performed, a result advantageous to the player is brought about. Therefore, the high navigation state is a gaming state advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, specifically, the advantage is that the total number of game media paid out by the game stand is compared to the total number of game media used by the player as a bet amount when playing a game for a predetermined period. Percentage, the so-called payout rate.

  In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than a loser), the normal state of the high navigation state is entered. After that, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), for example, the transition is made in the order of the confirmed notification state → the AT1 state → the judge state, and the transition is made from this judge state to the normal gaming state or the AT2 state via the pullback state. There are a route and a route that directly shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state. In this embodiment, when the transition to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is determined, a predetermined number (for example, 50 games) of the number of games in the AT mode (hereinafter referred to as the number of AT games) is given. Although details will be described later, when a certain condition is satisfied in the high navigation state, the state shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the effect state in each AT game state. As shown in FIG. 6 (b), each AT gaming state is further subdivided and managed, and this is called a production state. Specifically, the production state in the low navigation state includes a normal state, and the production state in the high navigation state includes a normal state, a final notification state, a judgment state, a pull-back state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are states in which the number of balls is increased in principle.

  Here, in principle, the limit state means the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981 game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981 game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state). There may be cases where the production state is not the limit state, but this case will be described later). In the present embodiment, when the high navigation state remains 20 games or less, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an “ED effect”) suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed.

<Direction table>
Next, an effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 9A illustrates an image of an effect table provided in the first sub-control unit 400. The storage means (for example, ROM 406 and RAM 408 shown in FIG. 3) of the first sub control unit 400 stores an effect table provided for each effect state.

  In the command processing (step S3604) of the first sub-control unit main process, which will be described later, the first sub-control unit 400 provides the effect information (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, In the subsequent effect control process (step S3605), an effect table corresponding to the effect state or the like is referred to and an effect corresponding to the effect state counter or the like is performed. For example, if the current effect state is the AT1 state, a process such as referring to an effect table (AT1 state effect table) corresponding to the AT1 state and reading effect data for executing the AT1 effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

  In addition, when the current performance state is the judge state, a process such as referring to the performance table (judge state performance table) corresponding to the judge state and reading out the performance data for executing the judgment effect described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

  FIG. 9B is a diagram showing an example of the judgment state effect table. When the presentation state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the judgment state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to, for example, the judge state presentation table as shown in FIG. Judge production corresponding to points and production status counters.

  Specifically, when performing production control according to the judgment state production table shown in FIGS. 9B and 9A, when the point is 1, the enemy character is A → A → A → B (the expectation is A <B) Judge effect to change in the order, and when the point is 2, judge effect to change the enemy character in the order of A → A → B → B. Also, when performing the effect control according to the judgment state effect table shown in FIGS. 9B and 9B, when the value of the effect state counter is N (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N), the effect mode is D1. -1 → D2-1 → D3-1 →... Judge effect is changed, and when the value of the effect state counter is N−1 (the number of remaining games in the judge state is N−1), the effect mode is changed. Judge effects are changed in the order of D1-2 → D2-2 → D3-2 →.

  Further, when the current effect state is the LMT state, a process such as referring to an effect table (LMT state effect table) corresponding to the LMT state and reading effect data for executing an LMT effect to be described later from the ROM 406 is performed. If the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

  FIG. 9C shows an example of the LMT state effect table. When the effect state included in the command received from the main control unit 300 is the LMT state, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the LMT state effect table as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a corresponding opportunity (such as a start condition or an end condition of an effect) has arrived, and when the opportunity arrives, an effect corresponding to the counter is performed.

  Specifically, when effect control is performed according to the LMT state effect table shown in FIGS. 9 (c) and (1), the value of the effect state counter is 1 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 1), and the start lever 135. When a pressing operation (Levaon) is received, the current setting value is selected from among a plurality of types of effects A1 to A3 using the lottery table for setting suggestion effects A shown in FIGS. A predetermined effect is selected, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed, and a setting suggestion effect A (for example, display of a character image) is executed.

  Further, when the value of the effect state counter is 0 (the number of remaining games in the LMT state is 0) and the third stop operation is received, the lottery table for the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIGS. Using a plurality of types of effects B1 to B10, a predetermined effect is selected according to the current set value, and processing such as reading effect data for executing the effect from the ROM 406 is performed. (For example, the background image of the end screen) is executed.

  Further, although details will be described later, in the case of a two-sheet betting game, in the case of performing a control to continuously display a specific scene in the linked effect (not to display subsequent scenes), the main controller 300 performs the effect state. Since the counter value is not updated, the first sub-control unit 400 continues to display the scene corresponding to the same effect state counter value. Note that the control method for continuously displaying a specific scene (not displaying subsequent scenes) in the interlocking production is not limited to this example. For example, the main control unit 300 switches to the first sub-control unit 400. You may comprise so that the command for displaying the subsequent scene in an effect may not be transmitted.

  In addition, the production mode, type, and determination method of the setting suggestion production are not limited to this example. For example, as shown in FIG. 9D, according to the current production state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state). The execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be changed. For example, when the effect state counter (the number of remaining games in the LMT state) is small, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect may be higher or lower.

<Operation of slot machine>
Based on the above characteristics, the processes of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 10 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after being reset by a reset interrupt.

  When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are made in step S101. In this initial setting, setting of a stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of interrupt prohibition, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, operation permission to the WDT 314, and initial setting Set the value.

  In step S102, a bet number setting / start operation accepting process (described later in detail) is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparation for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted is made. When a re-game player is won in the previous game, the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game are processed, so that it is not necessary for the player to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated. If there is an operation of the start lever 135, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, a winning line determination process for determining the number of inserted medals and determining a valid winning line is performed.

  In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and the internal lottery is performed using the acquired random number value, and the result of the internal lottery is shown. Preparation for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400 is performed. As a result of the internal lottery, when any winning combination (including an operating combination) is won internally, the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

  In step S105, a reel stop data selection process for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. In step S <b> 105, preparation is made for transmitting a reel stop data command including information on the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S106, an effect control process A (details will be described later) related to the control of the AT gaming state is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, an effect process is executed. In this effect processing, freeze effect control and the like are performed.

  Here, the freeze effect is an effect that makes it seem that the originally planned effect has been interrupted, or an effect that makes the slot machine seem to stop responding. Furthermore, for light emission, for example, the stop of the change in lighting mode is referred to as “freeze”, for sound output, for example, the same sound that is continuously output is referred to as “freeze”, and for operation, for example, the operation is halfway. Stopping may be referred to as freezing.

  In step S108, a reel rotation start process is executed to start rotation of all the reels 110 to 112.

  In step S109, a reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be received. When any one of the stop buttons is pressed, a reel stop data stop table is set to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. With reference, any of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of frames drawn in the stop table. When all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In step S109, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command, the second stop operation In response to the stop button reception 2 command and the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared for transmission to the first sub-control unit 400. Reel stop command related to the stop position (specifically, a reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, and a reel stop for the third stop operation. 3 commands) is prepared for transmission to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning determination process, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination is won. For example, if “bell-bell-bell” is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination 3 (bell) is won. In step S110, preparation for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400 is made.

  In step S111, a medal grant process is performed. In the medal granting process, if any winning combination with payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

  In step S112, game state control processing is performed. In the gaming state control process, processing relating to transition of each RT gaming state is performed, and the gaming state is shifted when those start conditions or end conditions are satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the current RT system game state.

  In step S113, an effect control process B (details will be described later) related to the control of the AT gaming state is executed. In step S114, high navigation state end processing (details will be described later) relating to the end of the high navigation state is executed.

  Thus, one game is completed. Thereafter, the game proceeds by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described processing. The various commands prepared in the above steps are transmitted in a command setting transmission process (step S2006 in FIG. 11) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S2001, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S2002, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S2003, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and each of the various sensors 318 is partitioned in the RAM 308. Store in the provided signal state storage area.

  In step S2004, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated for each time unit.

  In step S2006, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S2007, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to an information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

  In step S2008, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area in step S2003 are read, and the presence / absence of errors relating to medal insertion abnormality and medal payout abnormality is monitored. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

  In step S2009, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S2011, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S2010.

  In step S2010, various processes for ending the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each original register. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S2011, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of first sub-control unit>
Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.

  When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S3001. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, an area for storing internal winning information that is information representing the result of the internal winning and an area for storing RT update information that is information indicating the gaming state are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

  In step S3002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S3003. In step S3003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S3004, command processing that is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300 is executed.

  In step S3005, effect control processing is performed. Here, preparation for the production is performed according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing a process such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S3006, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S3007, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the various lamps 420 in the effect data read out in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S3008, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result in step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S3005, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S3009, an information output process for performing setting to transmit a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result in step S3005 is performed. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S3005, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S3002.

  Next, a command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S3101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S3201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S3002 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 12A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Accordingly, in step S3002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S3202, a command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S3009, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S4001 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S4001. In this initialization processing, input / output port initialization, storage area initialization processing in the RAM 508, storage area initialization processing in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

  In step S4002, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, 0 is substituted for the timer variable. In step S4004, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command is received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S4005, an effect control process is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S4004, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading effect data for performing image control relating to the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, it includes a process of reading other effect data from the ROM 506 and performing an effect data update process when the effect data needs to be updated.

  In step S4006, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result in step S4005. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S4005, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control relating to a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S4002.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S4101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S4201, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S4002 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 13A, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Accordingly, in step S4002, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S4202, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S4006 in the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S4301, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 536. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 536), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 534 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 536 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S4302, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from VDP 534 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S4303. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

  In step S4303, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 536 in step S4301, the CPU 504 includes information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 536). , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), transparency, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 534. The VDP 534 performs parameter setting in accordance with the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S4304, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In step S4305, it is determined whether a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S5306; Wait for input.

  In step S4306, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Betting number setting / start operation acceptance processing>
Next, the betting number setting / start operation accepting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the betting number setting / start operation accepting process in step S102 of FIG.

  In step S201, in a state where a medal can be inserted before the start lever operation, high navigation state update processing (details will be described later) relating to the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state and the update of the high navigation state is executed.

  In step S202, other betting number setting / start operation acceptance processing is executed. That is, the number of bets is set, and it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 is operated.

<High navigation state update processing>
Next, the high navigation state update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state update process in step S201 of FIG.

  In step S301, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state counter> 0. If the high navigation state counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S302. If not, the high navigation state update process is terminated. In step S302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the high navigation state counter.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. The high navigation state flag is a flag indicating whether or not the AT gaming state is a high navigation state, and indicates a high navigation state when on, and a low navigation state when off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S304. If not, the high navigation state update process is terminated.

  In step S304, the high navigation state flag is turned on. In this embodiment, an initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter in a game in which the transition from the low navigation state to the high navigation state is determined (see step S703 in FIG. 16B described later). When the start lever of the next game is operated, the high navigation state is entered. When the high navigation state flag is turned on, the high navigation state lamp 190 starts to light.

<Production state control process A>
Next, the effect state control process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of effect state control processing A in step S106 of FIG.

  In step S401, common game common processing (details will be described later) is executed. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the processing prohibition flag is off. The processing prohibition flag is a flag indicating whether or not processing related to the high navigation state is to be executed in the high navigation state. If the processing prohibition flag is off, the processing prohibition flag is a game that can execute processing related to the high navigation state. When the process prohibition flag is on, it indicates that the game does not execute the process related to the high navigation state. If the process prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S403. If not, that is, if the process prohibition flag is on, the process proceeds to step S406.

  In step S403, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S404. If the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, is on, the process proceeds to step S405.

  In step S404, since the vehicle is in the low navigation state, low navigation state processing A (described later in detail) is executed. In step S405, since the vehicle is in the high navigation state, high navigation state processing A (details will be described later) is executed. In step S406, other effect state control processing A is executed.

  In the production state control process A of the present embodiment, the process prohibition flag is provided, and the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is executed only when the process prohibition flag is off, but the process prohibition flag is not provided. May be. In this case, the low navigation state process A or the high navigation state process A is always executed in the effect state control process A.

<Common processing for each game>
Next, each game common process is demonstrated using FIG.15 (b). FIG. 15B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the common game process in step S401 of FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the high navigation state related process are satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state-related process is that the game is a recommended number of games (in this example, three betting games). Note that the recommended number of games is not limited to three games, and the recommended number of games may be different for each state of the slot machine. As a result of the determination in step S501, if the conditions for executing the high navigation state-related processing are satisfied (for example, if the game is a three-game betting game), the process proceeds to step S502; otherwise (for example, If the game is a game with two bets), the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S502, the processing prohibition flag is turned off. In step S503, the processing prohibition flag is turned on. In step S504, other common game processes are executed.

<Low navigation state processing A>
Next, common game common processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the low navigation state process A in step S404 of FIG.

  In step S601, high navigation state transition processing (described later in detail) for determining whether or not to shift to the high navigation state is executed. In step S602, other low navigation state processing A is executed.

<High navigation state transition processing>
Next, the high navigation state transition process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16B is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state transition process in step S601 of FIG.

  In step S701, high navigation state transition determination is executed. In this high navigation state transition determination, when the high navigation state transition condition is satisfied (in this example, when a winning combination other than a loser is won in the winning combination internal lottery process), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, and the next Decide to move from the game to the high navigation state.

  In step S702, it is determined whether or not high navigation state transition has been determined. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S703, and if not, the high navigation state transition process is terminated.

  In step S703, an initial value (1000 in this example) is set in the high navigation state counter. Needless to say, the initial value of the high navigation state counter is not limited to 1000, and may be 1500, for example. In step S705, other high navigation state transition processing is executed. Here, the number of games to be executed after shifting to the high navigation state is set, and for example, an initial value (700 in this example) is set as the value of the ceiling counter.

  In step S701, in the high navigation state transition determination, the transition to the high navigation state is determined when a winning combination other than a loss is won. However, the high navigation transition condition is not limited to this, and for example, a random value is set. Transition to the high navigation state may be determined based on the lottery result used, or lottery is performed using the lottery value provided for each winning combination, and transition to the high navigation state is performed based on the lottery result. May be determined.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state process A in step S405 of FIG.
In step S801, high navigation state common processing (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S802, it is determined whether or not the performance state is a normal state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S803, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S803, normal state processing A (described later in detail) is executed. Although details will be described later, in the normal state process A, for example, a counter for the number of games in the effect state (predictor state) is subtracted. In addition, an effect is set for the game in accordance with the result of the winning combination internal lottery process.

  In step S804, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a fixed notification state. If it is applicable, the process proceeds to step S805, and if not, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S805, fixed notification state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S806, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S807, and if not, the process proceeds to step S808. In step S807, AT1 state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S808, it is determined whether or not the performance state is a judgment state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S809, and if not, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S809, judgment state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S810, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S811, and if not, the process proceeds to step S812. In step S811, judgment state processing A (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S812, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a pullback state. If yes, the process proceeds to step S813. If not, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S813, a pull-back state process A (described later in detail) is executed.

  In step S814, instruction information setting processing (details will be described later) related to setting of instruction information is executed.

<High navigation state common processing A>
Next, the high navigation state common processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state common processing A in step S801 of FIG.

  In step S901, it is determined whether or not the production state counter> 0. If the performance state counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S902, 1 is subtracted from the value of the effect state counter. Here, the effect state counter is a counter for managing the transition of the effect state. If the number of games in each production state is determined by lottery or table, etc., the value obtained from the lottery result or table etc. may be set as the value of the production state counter, or the state shifts to the high navigation state. When doing so, the number of games in some or all of the production states may be determined collectively.

  In step S903, it is determined whether or not the current performance state is the LMT state. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S904, and if not, the process proceeds to step S909.

  In step S904, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S906, and if not, The process proceeds to step S905. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but other numerical values may be used.

  In step S905, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference sheet counter is equal to or smaller than the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example). If yes, the process proceeds to step S906. The process proceeds to S909. In this example, the high navigation state is terminated when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum payout number in the 3 betting game is 11 (maximum increase number is 8), and the difference number exceeds 2000. Therefore, although the LMT transition value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets−8 sheets × 20 G), other numerical values may be used.

  In step S906, the LMT initial value (19 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S907, freeze information (various information for executing the freeze effect) is set. In step S908, after the LMT state is set as the effect state, the process proceeds to step S909. Thereby, the effect state shifts from the game to the LMT state. In this example, in order to shift from the game to the LMT state, the LMT initial value is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but other numerical values may be used.

  In step S909, after the other high navigation state common processing A is executed, the high navigation state common processing A is terminated.

<Normal state processing A>
Next, the normal state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A in step S803 of FIG.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether ceiling counter> 0. If the ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1002, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter. Here, the ceiling counter is a counter for managing the number of games up to the ceiling. In this embodiment, an initial value (700 in this example) is set in the ceiling counter in step S705 of the high navigation state transition process described with reference to FIG. May be.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether the AT1 winning flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1004. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step 1005. In step S1005, an AT1 transition lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 transition lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT1 state. In this example, whether or not to win is determined based on the result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination, a random value, or the like. The contents of the AT1 transition lottery are not limited to this example. For example, the winning or failing may be determined by taking into account the value of the high navigation state counter or the like, and points based on the result of the internal lottery process of the winning combination May be determined based on the points.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether or not the AT1 transition lottery in step S1005 has been won. If it has been won, the process proceeds to step S1007. If not, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1007, an AT1 type lottery is performed. Here, the AT1 type lottery is a lottery for determining the type of the AT1 state, and in this example, the AT1 type lottery is determined to be either “high” or “low” based on a random value or the like. Note that the content of the AT1 type lottery is not limited to this example. For example, “high” is selected as the AT1 type in the lottery when winning the AT1 transition lottery than the lottery when reaching the ceiling. A configuration that is easy (or difficult to select) may be used.

  In step S1008, the result of the AT1 type lottery in step S1007 is set to the AT1 type. In the next step S1009, the number of games is determined by lottery, and the number of games is set in the effect state counter. In step S1010, after the AT1 winning flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is “low”. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1012. If not, the process proceeds to step 1014. In step S1012, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed. Here, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining a numerical value to be added to the promotion counter. In this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1013, the numerical value determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1012 (lottery result value) is added to the promotion counter, and the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1014, a judgment mode lottery is performed. Here, the judge mode lottery is a lottery for determining one of the multiple judge modes (in this example, “normal”, “high accuracy”, and “heaven”). Yes, in this example, the judgment mode is determined based on a random value or the like. In step S1015, after the lottery result of the judgment mode lottery in step S1014 is set to the judgment mode, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1106, after other normal state processing A is performed, normal state processing A ends.

<Confirmed notification state processing A>
Next, the fixed notification state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the fixed notification state process A in step S805 of FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the AT1 type is “low”. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1102, and if not, the process proceeds to step 1107. In step S1102, promotion counter addition lottery is performed. As described above, the promotion counter addition lottery is a lottery for determining a numerical value to be added to the promotion counter. In this example, the numerical value is determined based on a random number value or the like. In step S1103, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery in step S1102 is added to the promotion counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1104.

  In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is a ceiling value (for example, 700) or more. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1105. If not, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1105, “high” is set as the AT1 type, and in next step S1106, “high accuracy” is set in the judgment mode, and the process proceeds to step S1109.

  In step S1107, a judgment mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judgment mode lottery is a lottery for determining any judgment mode from a plurality of types of judgment modes (in this example, “normal”, “high accuracy”, and “heaven”). In this example, the judgment mode is determined based on a random value or the like. In step S1108, after the lottery result of the judgment mode lottery in step S1107 is set to the judgment mode, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1109, after the other fixed notification state processing A is performed, the final notification state processing A is terminated.

<AT1 state processing A>
Next, the AT1 state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT1 state process A in step S807 of FIG.

  In step S1201, judge mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judgment mode lottery is a lottery for determining any judgment mode from a plurality of types of judgment modes (in this example, “normal”, “high accuracy”, and “heaven”). In this example, the judgment mode is determined based on a random value or the like. In step S1202, after the lottery result of the judgment mode lottery in step S1201 is set to the judgment mode, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, after other AT1 state processing A is performed, AT1 state processing A ends.

<Judge state processing A>
Next, the judgment state process A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judgment state processing A in step S809 of FIG.

  In step S1301, it is determined whether release counter> 0. If the release counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1302, 1 is subtracted from the value of the release counter. Here, the cancellation counter is a counter for managing the number of games until the judgment mode is canceled. In the present embodiment, the lottery value is set in the release counter in step S2104 of the AT1 state process B to be described later, but other numerical values may be used. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the release counter = 0. If the release counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S1306. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1304, a release lottery according to the judgment mode is performed. In the next step S1305, if the release lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1307. . Here, the release lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the AT2 state. In this example, when the judgment mode is heaven and the release lottery is won, the heaven in the judgment mode is continued without shifting to the AT2 state. In addition, if the judge mode is heaven and a specific rare role (in this example, small role 2 or small role 3) is won internally, AT2 has a probability of 100% regardless of the result of the release lottery. Transition to the state. Note that the content of the release lottery is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to a specific zone.

  In step S1306, after the determined state is set in the judgment state, the process proceeds to step S1307. In this example, when it is determined in step S1303 that the release counter = 0 (when the judgment mode heaven has ended), the AT2 state is set to the judge state in step S1306. That is, in this example, when the heaven in the judgment mode is completed, the state transitions to the AT2 state with a probability of 100%. In steps S1304 to S1305, when the judgment mode is heaven and the release lottery is won, the judgment mode heaven is set to the judgment state. Also, in steps S1304 to S1305, when the judgment mode is heaven and a specific rare combination (in this example, small combination 2 or small combination 3) is won internally, regardless of the result of the release lottery, In step S1306, the AT2 state is set to the judgment state.

  In step S1307, after the other judgment state processing A is performed, the AT1 state processing A is terminated.

<AT2 state processing A>
Next, AT2 state processing A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT2 state process A in step S811 of FIG.

  In step S1401, an AT number addition lottery is performed. Here, the AT number addition lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games to be added (added) to the number of AT games. In step S1402, the lottery result value (the number of added games) of the AT number addition lottery is added to the effect state counter.

  In step S1403, a judgment mode lottery is performed. As described above, the judgment mode lottery is a lottery for determining any judgment mode from a plurality of types of judgment modes (in this example, “normal”, “high accuracy”, and “heaven”). In this example, the judgment mode is determined based on a random value or the like. In step S1403, after the lottery result of the judgment mode lottery in step S1401 is set to the judgment mode, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, after performing other AT2 state processing A, AT2 state processing A ends.

<Retraction state processing A>
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the withdrawal state process A will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pullback state process A in step S813 of FIG.

  In step S1501, a pull-back lottery is performed. In step SS1502, it is determined whether or not a pull-back lottery is won. In step S1503, the determined state is set as the retracted state. In this example, the lottery result of the pullback lottery in step S1501 is set to the pullback state. In step S1504, after the other pull back state process A is performed, the pull back state process A ends.

<Instruction information setting process>
Next, the instruction information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the instruction information setting process in step S814 of FIG.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether or not the effect state is an instruction information notification enabled state. Here, the instruction information notification enabled state indicates the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT state in this example. If the performance state is the instruction information notification enabled state, the process proceeds to step S1602, and if not, the instruction information setting process ends.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the winning combination internal lottery process has been won internally. In this example, the pushing order means an internal winning of “small role 4” in the condition device. If the internal winning combination is selected, the process proceeds to step S1603. If not, the instruction information setting process is terminated.

  In step S1603, the correct pressing order is set for the information (instruction information) related to the notification content of the instruction information notification. As a result, the operation navigation using the payout number display device 127 is executed (see FIG. 8). Although illustration is omitted, in step S1603, other operation navigation information setting processing is executed. For example, an operation navigation command including instruction information indicating the correct answer pressing order is prepared for transmission to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 is executed by the first sub-control unit 400.

  In the final notification state of this example, the medal continues to decrease until the small role corresponding to the AT1 type wins. When the internal winning is made, the operation navigation is executed only for a specific kind of pressing order (for example, when the small winning 4 is won internally, either one of the small winning 4 LCR,..., The small winning 4 RCL or The operation navigation may be executed for a plurality of times, or the operation navigation is executed once every three times (for example, when the winning order cannot be won three times, the next pressing order It is also possible to perform push order navigation when winning an internal winning combination).

<Production state control process B>
Next, the effect state control process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the effect state control process B in step S113 of FIG.

  In step S1701, it is determined whether the processing prohibition flag is off. If the process prohibition flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1702, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is off. If the high navigation state flag is off, the process proceeds to step S1703. If the high navigation state flag is not off, that is, if the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S1704.

  In step S1703, since the vehicle is in the low navigation state, the low navigation state process B is executed. Although illustration is omitted, in the low navigation state process B, when the transition to the high navigation state is determined, a process of setting the production state based on information on each production state is performed.

  On the other hand, in step S1704, since it is in the high navigation state, high navigation state processing B (details will be described later) is executed. In step S1705, after the other effect state control process B is executed, the effect state control process B is terminated.

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state process B in step S1704 of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the performance state is a normal state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1802, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1803. In step S1802, normal state processing B (described later in detail) is executed.

  In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a fixed notification state. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1804. If not, the process proceeds to step S1805. In step S1804, final notification state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT1 state. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1806, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1806, AT1 state processing B (described later in detail) is executed.

  In step S1807, it is determined whether or not the production state is a judgment state, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S1808, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1808, judgment state processing B (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the AT2 state. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1810, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1811. In step S1812, AT2 state process B (described later in detail) is executed.

  In step S1811, it is determined whether or not the effect state is a pull-back state. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1812, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1813. In step S1812, a pull-back state process B (details will be described later) is executed.

  In step S1813, after executing the LMT state process B (details will be described later), the high navigation state process B is terminated.

<Normal state processing B>
Next, the normal state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing B in step S1802 of FIG.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether the production state counter = 0 (whether the normal state has ended). If the performance state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S1902, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1903. In step S1902, after the final notification state is set as the production state, the process proceeds to step S1903. As a result, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the normal state to the confirmed notification state, and an effect (for example, bonus confirmed display) corresponding to the confirmed notification state is started. In step S1903, after other normal state processing B is performed, normal state processing B is terminated.

<Confirmed notification state processing B>
Next, the fixed notification state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the fixed notification state processing B in step S1804 of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether the final notification flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2002. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2002, after the confirmation notification flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type.

  Specifically, in this example, when the AT1 type is low, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is “re-gamer 2, 4 to 10” of the condition device No. 3, and the AT1 type is In the case of high, it is determined whether or not the internal winning result is “re-game player 3, 4, 6, 8, 10-13” of condition device No. 4. As a result of the determination, if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2004. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In step S2004, the AT1 initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S2005, the AT1 state is set in the effect state, and the process proceeds to step S2006. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the confirmed notification state to the AT1 state, and the effect (for example, operation navigation) corresponding to the AT1 state is started. In this embodiment, an initial value (20 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2004, but other numerical values may be used. In step S2006, after the other fixed notification state process B is performed, the fixed notification state process B is terminated.

<AT1 state processing B>
Next, the AT1 state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT1 state process B in step S1806 of FIG.

  In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the AT1 state has ended). If the performance state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2102; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2106. In step S2102, the judgment initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In this embodiment, an initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2102, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

  In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the judgment mode is heaven. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2104, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2105. In step S2104, the lottery value (number of games) determined in the lottery is set in the release counter, and then the process proceeds to step 2105. In addition, although the content of the lottery in step S2104 is not specifically limited, in this example, a smaller numerical value is selected as the setting value is higher, and a smaller numerical value is selected when there is a heaven mode stock, and the value of the high navigation state counter is smaller. A smaller numerical value is selected.

  In step S2105, after the judgment state is set in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2106. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT1 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2106, after performing other AT1 state processing B, AT1 state processing B ends.

<Judge state processing B>
Next, the judgment state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the judgment state process B in step S1808 of FIG.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the judgment state = determined (whether or not the judge has succeeded). If the king is determined, the process proceeds to step S2202, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2202, the initial number of ATs is lottery twice. This AT2 number initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values of 30, 50, 55, 66, and 100 is selected by lottery. As an exception, when the setting value is setting 5, 55 is selected regardless of lottery, and when the setting value is setting 6, 66 is selected regardless of lottery.

  In step S2203, the lottery value (number of games) of the AT2 initial number lottery is set in the effect state counter, and then the process proceeds to step 2204. In step S2204, the AT2 state is set as the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step S2208. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the judge state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started.

  In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the production state counter = 0 (whether or not the judge state has ended). If yes, the process proceeds to step S2206. If not, the process proceeds to step S2208. In step S2206, a pullback initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter, and in the next step S2207, a pullback state is set in the effect state. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the retracted state, and the effect corresponding to the retracted state is started.

  In this embodiment, the pull back initial value (1 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2206, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, it may be a fixed value other than 1 or 1 + α (variation value). In step S2208, after other judgment state processing B is performed, the judgment state processing B is terminated.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, the AT2 state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the AT2 state process B in step S1810 of FIG.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether or not the production state counter = 0 (whether or not the AT2 state has ended). If the performance state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2302, an initial judgment value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter. In this embodiment, an initial value (10 in this example) is set in the effect state counter in step S2302, but other numerical values may be used. Therefore, for example, the initial value may be changed according to the effect state immediately before the judge state, or the initial value may be determined by lottery.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether or not the judgment mode is heaven. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2304, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2304, the lottery value (number of games) determined in the lottery is set in the release counter, and then the process proceeds to step 2305. In addition, although the content of the lottery in step S2304 is not specifically limited, in this example, a smaller numerical value is selected as the setting value is higher, and a smaller numerical value is selected when there is a heaven mode stock, and the value of the high navigation state counter is small. A smaller numerical value is selected.

  In step S2305, after the judgment state is set in the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2306. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state, and the effect corresponding to the judge state is started. In step S2306, after other AT2 state processing B is performed, AT2 state processing B ends.

<Retraction state processing B>
Next, the pull back state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pull back state process B in step S1812 of FIG.

  In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the pullback state = confirmed (whether or not the pullback is performed). If yes, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2405. In step S2402, the initial number of ATs is determined by lottery twice. This AT2 number initial number lottery is a lottery for determining the number of games in the AT2 state. In this example, one of the numerical values of 30, 50, 55, 66, and 100 is selected by lottery. As an exception, when the setting value is setting 5, 55 is selected regardless of lottery, and when the setting value is setting 6, 66 is selected regardless of lottery.

  In step S2404, after the AT2 state is set as the effect state, the process proceeds to step S2407. Thereby, in the next game, the effect state shifts from the retracted state to the AT2 state, and the effect corresponding to the AT2 state is started. In the present embodiment, in the initial hit (transition from the low navigation state to the first AT state after transitioning from the high navigation state), the production state transitions to AT1, whereas in the judge state or the withdrawal state, The performance state is configured to shift to AT2, which is more advantageous to the player than AT1.

  In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the production state counter = 0 (whether or not the pullback state has ended). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2406, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2406, after the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2407. In step S2407, after the other pull back state process B is performed, the pull back state process B ends.

<LMT state processing B>
Next, the LMT state process B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of LMT state processing B in step S1813 of FIG.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether or not an effect state counter = 0 (whether or not the LMT state has ended). If the performance state counter = 0, the process proceeds to step S2502, and if not, the LMT state process B ends. In step S2502, after the high navigation state end standby flag is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, after performing other LMT state processing B, the LMT state processing B is terminated.

<High navigation state end processing>
Next, the high navigation state end process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the high navigation state end process in step S114 of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state flag is on. If the high navigation state flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2602, and if not, the high navigation state end process ends. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the high navigation state end standby flag is on. If the high navigation state end standby flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2603; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2603, the high navigation state end standby flag is turned off. After step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2606.

  In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is zero. This is because when there is a game with the processing prohibition flag turned on, the value of the high navigation state counter may become 0 before the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on. It is. If the value of the high navigation state counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S2606; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2605.

  In step S2605, it is determined whether or not the difference number counter> the high navigation state end maximum value, and if applicable, the process proceeds to step S2606, and if not, the high navigation state end process is ended. This is because if there is a game with the processing prohibition flag turned on, the condition that the difference counter> high navigation state end maximum value may be satisfied before the high navigation state end standby flag is turned on. It corresponds to the case.

  In step S2606, the high navigation state flag is turned off. As a result, the high navigation state lamp 190 that has been turned on is turned off. In step S2607, after the other high navigation state end processing is executed, the high navigation state end processing is ended. In other high navigation state ending processes, for example, the AT game state is set to a low navigation state (normal mode), and various flags and counters used for transition control of the high navigation state are initialized. Do.

<Normal State Processing A (Modification 1)>
Next, the normal state process A according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 19 described above, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A according to the first modification. In addition, about the process same as the normal state process A demonstrated using FIG. 19, while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol in a figure, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the normal state process A according to the modification 1, the processes in steps S1012 to S1013 are deleted and the processes in steps S1021 to S1025 are added to the normal state process A described with reference to FIG.

  Step S1021 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1004 that the ceiling counter is 0. In this example, a process of setting the ceiling arrival flag to ON is executed in step S1021.

  Step S1022 is a process executed when it is determined that the AT1 type is “low”. In this example, it is determined in step S1022 whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on. If so, the process proceeds to step S1023. If not, the process proceeds to step S1016. In step S1023, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1024, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In step S1024, “high” is set as the AT1 type, and in the next step S1025, the judgment mode is set to “high accuracy”, and then the process proceeds to step S1106.

  In the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, the AT1 type is set to “low” or “high” when reaching the ceiling in the normal state, and after shifting to the final notification state, the AT1 type is changed from “low” to “high”. To be promoted to "". On the other hand, in the normal state process A according to the modified example 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is set to “low”. It is configured so that the judgment mode is set with high accuracy.

<Normal State Processing A (Modification 2)>
Next, normal state processing A according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 19 described above, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of normal state processing A according to the second modification. In addition, about the process same as the normal state process A demonstrated using FIG. 19 and the normal state process A (modification 1) demonstrated using FIG. 36, while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol in a figure, the description is abbreviate | omitted. To do.

  In the normal state process A according to the modified example 2, the processes in steps S1012 to S1013 are deleted from the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19, and the processes in steps S1021 to S1025 and the processes in steps S1031 to S1032 are performed. Is added.

  Step S1031 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1022 that the ceiling arrival flag is on. In this example, in step S1031, the promotion counter addition lottery is executed, and then in the next step S1032. After the numerical value determined by the promotion counter addition lottery (the lottery result value) is added to the promotion counter, the process proceeds to step S1016.

  In the normal state process A according to the modified example 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter. When the ceiling counter becomes 0, the AT1 type is changed from “low” to “high”. In addition to being promoted, it was configured to set the judge mode with high accuracy. On the other hand, in the normal state process A according to the modified example 2, when the ceiling counter reaches 0, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high” and the judgment mode is set with high accuracy. However, if the value of the promotion counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high”. Yes.

<Confirmed notification state processing A (Modification 1)>
Next, the fixed notification state process A according to the modification example 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 20 described above, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the final notification state process A according to the first modification. In addition, about the process same as the fixed notification state process A demonstrated using FIG. 20, while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol in a figure, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The fixed notification state process A according to the modified example 1 is obtained by deleting the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 and adding the processes of steps S1121 to S1125 to the fixed notification state process A described with reference to FIG. .

  In step S1120, it is determined whether ceiling counter> 0. If the ceiling counter> 0, the process proceeds to step S1121, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1101. In step S1121, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ceiling counter.

  Step S1123 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1101 that the AT1 type is “low”. In this example, in step S1123, it is determined whether the ceiling arrival flag is off or on. If so, the process proceeds to step S1124. If not, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1124, it is determined whether or not the ceiling counter is 0. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1125, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1109. In step S1125, after setting the ceiling flag to ON, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In the fixed notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high” after shifting to the fixed notification state. On the other hand, in the confirmed notification state process A according to the modified example 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the confirmed notification state, AT1 The type is promoted from “low” to “high”, and the judgment mode is set with high accuracy.

<Confirmed notification state processing A (Modification 2)>
Next, the fixed notification state process A according to the modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 20 described above, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the fixed notification state process A according to the second modification. In addition, about the process same as the fixed notification state process A demonstrated using FIG. 20 and the fixed notification state process A (modification 2) demonstrated using FIG. 38, while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol in a figure, the description Is omitted.

  The fixed notification state process A according to the modified example 2 deletes the processes of steps S1102 to S1104 from the fixed notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, and performs the processes of steps S1121 to S1125 and steps S1131 to S1131. S1133 is added.

  Step S1131 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1101 that the AT1 type is “low”. In this example, after the promotion counter addition lottery is executed in step S1131, the next step S1132 is executed. In step S1133, the numerical value (lottery result value) determined in the promotion counter addition lottery is added to the promotion counter. In step S1133, it is determined whether or not the value of the promotion counter is equal to or greater than the ceiling value. If yes, the process proceeds to step S1105, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1123.

  In the confirmed notification state process A according to the modified example 1, the state is managed only by the ceiling counter without using the promotion counter, and the AT1 type is set to “low” when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the confirmed notification state. It was configured to be promoted from “high” to “high”. On the other hand, in the fixed notification state process A according to the modified example 2, when the ceiling counter becomes 0 in the fixed notification state, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high”. Furthermore, when the status is managed using a promotion counter and the value of the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value, the AT1 type is promoted from “low” to “high”, while the value of the promotion counter is less than the ceiling value Is configured to promote the AT1 type from “low” to “high” when the ceiling counter is 0.

<Confirmed Notification State Processing A and Confirmed Notification State Processing B (Modification 3)>
Next, a fixed notification state process A and a fixed notification state process B according to Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 40 is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 20 described above, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the fixed notification state process A according to the third modification. FIG. 41 is a drawing corresponding to FIG. 29 described above, and is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the fixed notification state process B according to the third modification. In addition, about the process same as the fixed notification state process A demonstrated using FIG. 20 and the fixed notification state process B demonstrated using FIG. 29, while attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol in a figure, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The fixed notification state process A according to the third modification shown in FIG. 40 is obtained by adding the process of step S1140 to the fixed notification state process A described with reference to FIG. Step S1140 is a process executed when it is determined in step S1104 that the promotion counter is equal to or higher than the ceiling value. In step S1140, after the promotion flag is set to ON, the process proceeds to step S1109.

  The finalized notification state process B according to the third modification shown in FIG. 41 is obtained by adding steps S2010 to S2012 to the finalized notification state process B described with reference to FIG. Step S2010 is a process executed when it is determined in step S2001 that the fixed notification flag is on. In step S2010, it is determined whether the promotion flag is on or off. If it is on, step S2011 is performed. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2011, it is determined whether the promotion notification is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2012, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2012, after the promotion notification is turned on, the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In the fixed notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20 and the fixed notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, when the AT1 type is “low”, the promotion counter is not added. It was configured so that No. 4 internal winning would not occur at the same time. On the other hand, in the fixed notification state process A and the fixed notification state process B according to the modified example 3, the AT1 type promotion and the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 can be generated at the same time. It is configured not to shift to the state. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the simultaneous execution of the operation navigation and the promotion effect at the time of the AT1 type promotion, so that only the promotion effect can be shown to the player, and the player's interest is enhanced. There are cases where it is possible.

  In addition, when the normal state process A according to the modification example 1 described with reference to FIG. 36 and the normal state process A according to the modification example 2 described with reference to FIG. 37 are applied, the AT1 type promotion is performed in the ceiling reaching game. There is a possibility that the internal winning of the condition device No. 4 may occur at the same time. In this case, as in the third modification, the promotion flag is used to prevent the game from occurring simultaneously from shifting to the AT1 state. That's fine.

<Modification of Embodiment 1>
Next, a slot machine according to a modification of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In order to avoid redundant description, only the configuration different from the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described in principle. In addition, the reference numerals shown in FIG. 42 to FIG. 51 are used only in the description of the modification of the first embodiment in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, In the description of the modification, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 42 to 51 are given priority.

<Type of winning prize>
First, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the types of winning combinations (including actuating combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

  The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special combination (special combination 1) and a general combination (replay combination 1 to replay combination 3, small combination 1 to small combination 3). The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations and can be arbitrarily adopted.

  Among the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 is a combination that shifts to a special gaming state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. In addition, the re-playing role 1 to the re-playing role 3 are roles that enable re-playing without newly inserting medals. These winning combinations may be referred to as “acting combinations”. In addition, “winning” in the present embodiment includes a case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not accompany a medal payout (and does not accompany a medal payout) is displayed on the active line. A prize for re-playing role 1 to re-playing role 3 is included.

  The special combination 1 is a combination (operating combination) that shifts to a special gaming state by winning a prize. No medal will be paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is “BAR-BAR-BAR”.

  When the special combination 1 is won internally, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internal winning combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special combination internal winning state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2).

  This flag is kept on until winning the internal winning combination, and it becomes easy to win the internal winning combination in subsequent games. In other words, even if a game in which the special combination 1 is won internally, even if the special combination is not won, the special combination will be in the state where the special combination is won internally, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (in this example, “BAR− “BAR-BAR” symbol combination) is ready to win. This special combination internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

  The main control unit 300 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1. Further, in this special gaming state, when a predetermined number (300 in this example) is paid out, the game is shifted to a re-gaming low probability state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT1). The special game state (RT3) and the replay low probability state (RT1) will be described later.

  “Re-playing role (re-playing role 1 to re-playing role 3)” is a winning combination (operating role) that allows a game to be played without a medal (game medium) being inserted in the next game by winning, No medals will be paid out. It should be noted that the corresponding symbol combinations are “replay-replay-replay (normal replay)” for replay player 1, “bell-replay-replay (promotion replay)” for replay player 2, and “replay-” for replay player 3. "Replay-Bell (Tumble Replay 2)".

  “Small (Small 1 to 3)” is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning, and the corresponding symbol combinations are “ANY-Cherry-ANY” for Small and 1 for Small “Watermelon-watermelon-watermelon (watermelon 1)”, and the small part 3 is “bell-bell-bell (bell)”. The corresponding payout number is as shown in FIG. In the case of “ANY-cherry-ANY”, the symbol of the middle reel 111 may be “cherry”, and the symbols of the left reel 110 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol. In addition, when the small combination 2 (watermelon 1) is won internally, the watermelon symbols are arranged in more than 4 frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon symbol will be the winning line. Never stop.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the type and transition of the gaming state of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 43A is a game state transition diagram of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention is roughly classified into a replay low probability state (RT1), a replay high probability state (RT4), and a special role internal winning state (RT2). And a special gaming state (RT3). In the present embodiment, these four gaming states are referred to as RT gaming states. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 300 also controls a state related to a so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as an AT gaming state), and according to the AT gaming state determined by the main control unit 300, The first sub control unit 400 is configured to set a gaming state. The AT gaming state will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability that the condition device relating to the replaying role is not changed (default state), a replaying high probability state (RT4), a special role internal winning state (RT2) ) And the special game state (RT3) are also states in which the probability that the condition device relating to the re-gamer will operate varies with respect to the default state.

<Lottery table>
FIG. 44A shows a lottery table used in the internal lottery process for a winning combination. The horizontal axis represents each gaming state (RT gaming state), and the vertical axis represents the lottery value for each winning combination.

  The internal winning probability of the winning combination in each gaming state to be described later is a random number obtained from the lottery data prepared in the ROM 306 corresponding to the range of the lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by a value divided by numerical data in a numerical range (for example, 65535). For example, in the replay low probability state (RT1), the lottery value of the small combination 2 is 512, and the winning probability of the small combination 1 is 512/65536 × 100≈0.8%. The lottery data is divided into several numerical ranges in advance, and each combination and lose is associated with each numerical range.

  It is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to which combination, and the internal lottery combination is determined. This lottery data is provided with settings 1 to 6 in which the winning probabilities of at least one combination are different, and a game shop clerk can arbitrarily select and set one of the set values. In addition, the internal winning probability shown in this figure is an example, and is not limited to this probability.

  Hereinafter, the RT gaming state of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The replay low probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest (unfavorable for the player) among other game states (for example, game states other than the special game state), and is referred to as a normal game state There is also. In the replay low probability state, a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT1” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

  The winning combination that is won internally in the low replay probability state includes special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, replaying role 1, replaying role 1 + replaying role 2, small role 1, There are a small role 2, a small role 3a, and a small role 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed. The fact that the symbol combination related to winning in the winning line is not stopped may be referred to as “losing”. In addition, the fact that the winning combination has not been won may be expressed as “winning”.

  Here, “special combination 1 + small combination 1” indicates that special combination 1 and small combination 1 were simultaneously elected internally. Similarly, “special role 1 + small role 2” indicates that special role 1 and small role 2 were simultaneously elected internally. In these cases, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to any of the combinations is displayed according to the player's operation. More specifically, the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning line are stopped unless any of the winning combinations in the winning line is impossible.

  Also, “re-game combination 1 + re-play game combination 2” indicates that re-play game combination 1 and re-play game combination 2 are simultaneously elected internally. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with a correct operation sequence that is a predetermined operation sequence, a symbol combination (promotion replay) corresponding to the re-gamer 2 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 ( a) In the remarks column, refer to the correct answer in the pressing order), in other cases, the symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the re-player 1 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 (a) in the remarks column) , See when pressing order is incorrect).

  A combination in which the winning combination is determined by the operation order, such as “re-playing combination 1 + re-playing combination 2”, may be referred to as “push order”.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the correct operation sequence of “replaying combination 1 + replaying combination 2” will be described in detail. FIG. 44B is a diagram for explaining the correct operation sequence of the push order of the present embodiment.

  “Re-playing role 1 + re-playing role 2” is set to be subdivided into “re-playing role 2L”, “re-playing role 2C”, and “re-playing role 2R”. A different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided “re-game player 1 + re-game player 2”. In addition, the range of the lottery data associated with each of “replaying game 1 + replaying game 2” subdivided into three is the same.

  For example, when “re-gamer 2L” of “re-gamer 1 + re-gamer 2” is won internally, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is the correct operation, The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In addition, when “Re-Gamer 2C” among “Re-Gamer 1 + Re-Gamer 2” is won internally, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 is the correct operation, The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In addition, when “Re-Gamer 2R” of “Re-Gamer 1 + Re-Gamer 2” is won internally, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is the correct operation, The stop operation is an incorrect operation.

  Up to this point, “re-playing combination 1 + re-playing combination 2” in FIG. 44 (a) has been described, but “small combination 3a” is also a push combination in which the winning combination varies depending on the player's operation order.

  When “Pocket 3a” is won internally, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 3 (bell) is displayed on the winning line according to the player's operation order (FIG. 44 ( a) See remarks column). More specifically, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with a correct operation sequence that is a predetermined operation sequence, “Bell-Bell-Bell” is displayed on the winning line and 11 medals are paid out ( Bell prize). On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in accordance with the correct operation sequence, “bell-bell-bell” is not displayed on the winning line (losing).

  On the other hand, when the “small role 3b” is won internally, “bell-bell-bell” is displayed on the winning line regardless of the operation order, and 11 medals are paid out. (Refer to the remarks column in FIG. 44 (a)).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the correct operation sequence of the “small role 3a” will be described in detail.

  The “small role 3a” is accurately classified into six “small role 3 LCR”, “small role 3 LRC”, “small role 3 CLR”, “small role 3 CRL”, “small role 3 RLC” and “small role 3 RCL”. It is set in a subdivided manner, and different correct operation sequences are assigned to the subdivided “small roles 3a”. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the “small roles 3a” subdivided into six is the same.

  For example, in the case where “Small 3LCR” of “Small 3a” is internally won, the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The stop operation is a correct operation, and the other stop operations are incorrect operations. Further, in the case where “Small 3CRL” of “Small 3a” is won internally, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel 110. The stop operation is a correct operation. The “small role 3a” and “small role 3b” described here are the same in the gaming state described below.

  FIG. 43 (a) shows a case where the condition (A) is satisfied in the replay low probability state (RT1), that is, the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the replay player 2 is displayed on the active line (replay) In the case of winning the winning combination 2), it is shown that the state shifts to a replay high probability state (RT2) described later. In addition, the figure shows that when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won internally, the state shifts to a special combination internal winning state (RT3) described later. ing. Furthermore, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed on the active line (when winning the special combination 1 or the special combination 2), A transition to a special gaming state (RT4) described later is shown.

  In the present embodiment, the small combination 3a as a push order is a single combination, but it may be a duplicate combination that is won simultaneously with other small combinations. In the case where the first to third stop operations are performed according to the correct operation sequence, the point winning the small combination 3 is the same.

  For example, when “small role 3 + small role A + small role B” is set, and (1) correct answer stop operation (correct answer operation order) is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to small role 3 is on the active line. When (2) incorrect answer stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is correct), the symbol combination corresponding to the small role A is displayed on the active line, and (3) incorrect answer stop operation is performed. (If the first stop operation is an incorrect answer) and the stop operation is performed within the drawing range of the small role B symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role B is displayed on the active line, (4) If an incorrect answer stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is incorrect), and if the stop operation is performed outside the drawing range of the small part B symbol, the spilled line will be on the active line It may be displayed.

  Also, when “small role 3 + small role X” is set, (1) when correct stop operation is performed (stop operation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is correct), it corresponds to the small role 3 (2) An incorrect answer stop operation is performed (the first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, second stop) If the operation is correct) and the third stop operation is performed within the drawing range of the small role X symbol, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role X is displayed on the active line, and (3) the incorrect answer is stopped. (The first stop operation is correct, the second stop operation is incorrect, or the first stop operation is incorrect, and the second stop operation is correct), and the third stop is outside the drawing range of the small role X symbol. When the operation is performed, the spilled eyes may be displayed on the active line. In the third stop operation, there is a case where the small combination X is won by aiming at the small combination X. Here, the correct answer to the stop operation means that the operation order is correct or / and the operation timing is suitable (operation within the drawing range of the symbol corresponding to the predetermined small role).

  In addition to the above-mentioned “small role 3 + small role X”, “small role 3 + small role Y” is set, and (1) when the correct answer is stopped, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role 3 is If it is displayed on the active line and (2) an incorrect answer stop operation is performed and a third stop operation is performed within the pull-in range of the small role X symbol, the symbol combination corresponding to the small role Y is If it is displayed on the active line, and (3) the incorrect answer is stopped and the third stop operation is performed outside the drawing range of the small part Y symbol, a spilled mark will be displayed on the active line. You may make it do. In this case, in the third stop operation in the incorrect answer stop operation, it is not known whether the small role X or the small role Y is to be aimed, so that it is possible to prevent the small role winning sniper in the third stop operation. There is a case.

<Replay high probability state (RT4)>
The re-gaming high probability state (RT4) is a gaming state in which the internal winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than the re-gaming low probability state (RT1). In the replay high probability state (RT4), a winning combination to be won internally is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT4” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG.

  In the replay high-probability state (RT4), the winning combinations that are won internally include special role 1, special role 1 + small role 1, special role 1 + small role 2, replay role 1, replay role 1 + replay role 3, small There are a combination 1, a small combination 2, a small combination 3a, and a small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  Here, “re-playing combination 1 + re-playing combination 3” indicates that re-playing combination 1 and re-playing combination 3 were internally elected simultaneously. In this case, it is determined which symbol combination corresponding to which combination is displayed according to the operation order of the player. More specifically, when a stop operation is performed in accordance with a correct operation sequence that is a predetermined operation sequence, a symbol combination (normal replay) corresponding to the re-game player 1 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 ( a) In the remarks column, refer to the correct answer in the pressing order), in other cases, the symbol combination (falling replay) corresponding to the replaying player 3 is displayed on the winning line (FIG. 44 (a) in the remarks column) , See when pressing order is incorrect. That is, “re-playing game 1 + re-playing game 3” is also a push order.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 44 (b), the correct operation sequence of “re-game 1 + re-game 3” will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the “re-playing role 1 + re-playing role 3” has three “re-playing role 3L”, “re-playing role 3C”, and “re-playing role 3R”. A different correct operation order is assigned to each of the subdivided “re-game player 1 + re-game player 3”. In addition, the range of the lottery data associated with each of “replaying game 1 + replaying game 3” subdivided into three is the same.

  For example, when “re-gamer 3L” among “re-gamer 1 + re-gamer 3” is won internally, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is the correct operation, The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In addition, when “Re-Gamer 3C” of “Re-Gamer 1 + Re-Gamer 3” is won internally, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 is the correct operation, The stop operation is an incorrect operation. In addition, when “Re-Gamer 3R” among “Re-Gamer 1 + Re-Gamer 3” is won internally, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is the correct operation, The stop operation is an incorrect operation.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning combination (replaying role 1 + replaying role 2, replaying role 1 + replaying role 3, small role 3a) is won internally, it is unique based on the subdivided internal winning combination. The correct operation order was determined, that is, the correct operation order was determined by one lottery process. However, when adopting a configuration that does not subdivide the push order, after winning the push order in the internal lottery process of the winning combination, the lottery process for determining the correct operation order is further executed to execute the correct operation. The order may be determined.

  In FIG. 43 (a), when the condition (B) is satisfied in the replay high probability state (RT4), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replaying player 3 is displayed on the active line (replaying) In the case of winning the winning combination 3), it is shown that the state shifts to the above-mentioned low replay probability state (RT1). In addition, the figure shows that when the condition (C) is satisfied, that is, when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won internally, the state shifts to the special combination internal winning state (RT2) described later. Furthermore, when the condition (D) is satisfied, that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is displayed on the active line (when the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is won) It is shown that a transition to a special gaming state (RT3), which will be described later, is made.

<Special role internal winning state (RT2)>
The special combination internal winning state (RT2) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special combination 1 or special combination 2 is set to ON, and when the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing, This is a gaming state in which a symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding special combination can be displayed. In the special combination internal winning state, a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT2” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The winning combination for internal winning in the special combination internal winning state includes a replaying combination 1, a small combination 1, a small combination 2, a small combination 3a, and a small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  Also, in FIG. 44A, when the condition (D) is satisfied in the special combination internal winning state (RT2), that is, when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed, A transition to a special gaming state (RT4) described later is shown.

<Special gaming state (RT3)>
The special game state (RT3) is a game state that is most advantageous to the player among all the game states. In the special game state, a winning combination to be internally won is drawn by referring to the lottery table in the column “RT3” on the horizontal axis shown in FIG. The only winning combination that is won internally in the special gaming state is only the small combination 3b. If the winning combination is not won, the game is lost, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed.

  FIG. 44 (a) shows that when the condition (E) is satisfied in the special gaming state (RT3), that is, when the specified number is paid out, the state shifts to the re-gaming low probability state (RT1). Has been. Specifically, in the case of shifting to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when the 275 medals are paid out, the re-game low probability state (RT1 ).

  In this embodiment, the special game state ends when a specified number of payouts are executed. For example, the special game state ends when a predetermined combination (for example, a single bonus) is won, or a predetermined number of times ( For example, the game may be ended when there are 8 winnings or when a predetermined number of games (for example, 6 times) are played.

<Transition of AT gaming state>
Next, the AT gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c). 43 (b) and 43 (c) are transition diagrams of the AT gaming state of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment of the present invention.

  The AT gaming state is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state as shown in FIG. The low navigation state is a state where the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode.

  The high navigation state is a state in which operation navigation is more likely to be executed than in the low navigation state, and there are an AT mode and a chance mode. Here, the operation navigation means the correct operation order when the internal winning is performed for the push order (specifically, the re-playing role 1 + the re-playing role 2, the re-playing role 1 + the re-playing role 3, the small role 3 a). An effect that informs That is, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the content of the stop operation for medal acquisition, the content of the stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state, or maintaining the advantageous game state.

  Here, the operation navigation will be described with reference to FIGS. In the present embodiment, the operation navigation is executed using the payout number display device 127 and the effect image display device 157. FIG. 44B shows display data indicating the correct operation sequence of the push order combination of this embodiment, and FIG. 45 is a diagram in which the display data and the lighting mode of the payout number display device 127 are associated with each other.

  For example, the display data 01 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110, the display data 02 is data suggesting a stop operation with the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, and the display data 03 is This is data suggesting a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112.

  Therefore, in the AT mode, when the re-game player 2L of “re-game player 1 + re-game player 2” is internally won, the stop operation with the first stop reel as the left reel 110 is correct, so the first stop operation is left The display data 01 suggesting that the display data 01 is selected, a lighting mode corresponding to the display data 01 is displayed on the payout number display device 127 (see FIG. 45A), and the effect image display device 157 is displayed. Then, an image (for example, “1--” characters) indicating that the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is displayed (not shown).

  The display data 04 is data indicating a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. The display data 05 is the first stop reel. The data indicating the stop operation with the left reel 110, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the middle reel 111, and display data 06 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111 and the second stop reel as the second stop reel. Data indicating a stop operation with the left reel 110 and the third stop reel as the right reel 112, and display data 07 are the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left. The display data 08 indicating the stop operation for the reel 110 includes the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third data. Data suggesting a stop operation with the stop reel as the middle reel 112, display data 09 is a stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112, the second stop reel as the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110. This suggests data.

  Therefore, in the AT mode, when the small combination 3CLR of the “small combination 3a” is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Since the stop operation is correct, display data 06 indicating that the first stop operation is middle, the second stop operation is left, and the third stop operation is right is selected, and the payout number display 127 displays the display data 06. Is displayed (see FIG. 45 (b)), and the effect image display device 157 has the first stop reel as the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the left reel 110, and the third stop reel as the third stop reel. An image suggesting that the reel is the right reel 112 (for example, “213” characters) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine whether the internal winning combination is a re-playing combination or a small combination 3a based on the lighting mode of the payout number display 127. However, for example, the correct stop operation of the small combination 3a may be set to three choices as in the re-game combination, and the small combination 3a may be notified using the display data 01 to 03. In this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode. Further, it may be configured such that the correct game stop operation of the re-gamer is made into 6 choices as in the small role 3a, and the re-gamer is also notified using the display data 04-09. Also in this case, the internal winning combination cannot be determined only by the lighting mode.

  In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is set to a state in which the operation navigation execution probability is low, and the high navigation state is set to a state in which the operation navigation execution probability is higher than the low navigation state. The state in which the navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When a stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation is performed, a result advantageous to the player is brought about. Therefore, the high navigation state is a gaming state advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, specifically, the advantage is that the total number of game media paid out by the game stand is compared to the total number of game media used by the player as a bet amount when playing a game for a predetermined period. Percentage, the so-called payout rate.

<AT system state transition>
FIG. 43 (b) is a diagram showing the effect state in each AT game state. As shown in FIG. 43 (b), each AT gaming state is further subdivided and managed, and this is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state in the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state in the high navigation state is the normal state, the final notification state, the judgment state, the pull-back state, the BB state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. I have. The production state in the high navigation state according to the modification of the first embodiment is simply the addition of the BB state to the production state described with reference to FIG.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, a main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 according to the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit main process according to a modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to the main control unit main process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the main control unit main process according to the modification of the first embodiment, the rendering state control process A in step S106, the rendering process in step S107, and the main control main process according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. The contents of the production state control process B in step S113 are changed.

<Production state control process A>
Next, the effect state control process A in step S121 in FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47A is a flowchart showing the flow of the performance state control process A according to the modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to the performance state control process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. It is.

  The effect state control process A according to the modification of the first embodiment is the same process as the effect state control process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. The description is omitted.

<Common processing for each game>
Next, with reference to FIG. 47 (b), the game common process in step S401 of FIG. 47 (a) will be described. FIG. 47 (b) is a flowchart showing the flow of each game common process according to a modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to the every game common process according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 15 (b). .

  In each game common process according to the modification of the first embodiment, the content of step S501 of the every game common process according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 15B is changed to the content of step S521. Specifically, in step S521, it is determined whether conditions for executing the high navigation state related process are satisfied. Here, the condition for executing the high navigation state-related processing is that the gaming state is either during the internal winning of a bonus or during the operation of a bonus with a setting difference. The condition is not limited to the operation of bonuses having a setting difference, and all bonuses may be operating. As a result of the determination in step S521, if the condition for executing the high navigation state related process is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S502, and if not, the process proceeds to step S503.

<High navigation state processing A>
Next, the high navigation state process A in step S405 in FIG. 47A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state process A according to the modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to the high navigation state process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the high navigation state process A according to the modification of the first embodiment, the processes of steps S821 and S822 are added to the high navigation state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S822, the BB state process A is executed. In this BB state processing A, processing related to BB games is performed.

<Processing for production>
Next, the effect processing in step S122 in FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect processing according to the modification of the first embodiment.

  In step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the high navigation state counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value A (19 in this example). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103, and if not, The process proceeds to step S2102. In this example, since the LMT state is 20G, the LMT transition value A is set to 19 (= 20G-1G), but other numerical values may be used.

  In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the value of the difference sheet counter is equal to or less than the LMT transition value B (1840 in this example). If applicable, the process proceeds to step S2103. The process proceeds to S2104. In this example, the high navigation state is terminated when the LMT state is 20G, the maximum payout number in the 3 betting game is 11 (maximum increase number is 8), and the difference number exceeds 2000. Therefore, although the LMT transition value B is set to 1840 (= 2000 sheets−8 sheets × 20 G), other numerical values may be used.

  In step S2103, freeze information is set, and in the next step S2104, after the other effect processing is executed, the effect processing is terminated.

  In the first embodiment, when the production state is the LMT state in the high navigation state common process A, the freeze state is set. However, in the modification of the first embodiment, the production state is the LMT state. Regardless of whether or not the condition of step S2101 or step S2102 is satisfied, the freeze state is set.

<Production state control process B>
Next, the effect state control process B in step S123 of FIG. 46 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the flow of the performance state control process B according to the modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to the performance state control process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  Steps S1701 to S1704 of the presentation state control process B according to the modification of the first embodiment are the same processes as the presentation state control process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. The description is omitted. In step S1721, after the other effect state control process B is executed, the effect state control process B is terminated. In the other effect state control process B, for example, when the high navigation state end condition is satisfied in the BB state and the high navigation state is shifted to the low navigation state, the effect state is shifted from the BB state to the normal state. .

<High navigation state processing B>
Next, the high navigation state process B in step S1705 of FIG. 50 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the flow of the high navigation state process B according to the modification of the first embodiment, and corresponds to the high navigation state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the high navigation state process B according to the modification of the first embodiment, the processes of step S1821 and step S1822 are added to the high navigation state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1821, it is determined whether or not the effect state is the BB state. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1822, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1822, the BB state process B is executed. In the BB state process B, a process of returning the effect state to the state immediately before the BB state after the end of the BB state is performed.

<Specific examples of various effects and various displays>
Next, specific examples of various effects and various displays executed by the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 78. 52 to 78 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, respectively, and show the effect aspects of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

  Here, the “low / high navigation state” item in each figure indicates an AT gaming state (in this example, a high navigation state or a low navigation state), and the “production state” item in each figure is , An effect state (in this example, a normal state, a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pull-back state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, or an LMT (limit) state) in each AT game state. In addition, the item “high navigation state counter” in each figure shows the number of remaining games in the high navigation state, and the item “production state counter” in each figure shows the number of remaining games in each presentation state. ing. Further, the item “BET” in each figure indicates the number of game media bets (BET number) in each game.

<Specific example of counter update display>
First, a specific example of counter update display will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. 52 to 54 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, respectively, and show the effect aspects of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3 betting games only>
FIG. 52 shows that in the high navigation state, the performance state transitions in the order of AT2 state → judgment state → LMT state (limit state), and then transitions to the normal state in the low navigation state, and only three betting games were performed. It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter at the time.

  The game R28 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 28 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 2, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R28, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). In addition to executing an AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) Since the count value is 2), the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is executed. .

  Note that the condition for starting the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not limited to the case where the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted. For example, until the third stopping operation is accepted, “ The display of “LAST 2G” may be started after the display of “LAST 3G” is executed and the third stop operation is accepted. Further, the effect mode of the AT2 effect is not particularly limited, and may be a series of effects executed over a plurality of games or an effect completed in one game, for example. The display mode of the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not limited to this example. For example, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is the number of icons or the like. May be indicated.

  The subsequent game R27 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 27 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 1, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R27, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as the game R28, while a display including an image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, (Displaying an image including the characters “LAST 1G”).

  The subsequent game R26 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 26 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 0, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R26, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as in the games R28 to R27, while a display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) In the example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G” is executed.

  Also, in this game R26, it is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted). The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image indicating the count value of the effect state counter (display of the image including the characters “LAST 0G” in this example) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. Note that the conditions for starting the AT2 end screen and the result display are not limited to the case where the third stop operation is accepted, and the effect mode of the AT2 end screen and the display contents of the result display are not particularly limited.

  The subsequent game R25 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 25 and the remaining number of games in the judge state that has shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a game of three bets has been performed. In this game R25, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after BET, etc.), the effect state is judged from the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition to the state has started, the judgment production corresponding to the start of the judgment state is started and the remaining number of games in the judgment state (the count value of the production state counter) is 10. Display (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 10G”) is executed.

  Thereafter, when the certain condition is satisfied in the game R25 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. From this, the judgment effect corresponding to the judge state is executed and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 9, so that the image showing the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, an image including the characters “LAST 9G” is displayed). Note that the flow of effects of the game R24 to the game R20 is substantially the same, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R19 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 19, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state that has shifted from the judge state is 19, and a game of three bets has been performed. In the game R19, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the judge state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has been made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) is executed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the effect state counter) Display (in this example, display of an image including characters “20/20 more”) is executed. It should be noted that the painting of the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not yet been performed at the same timing.

  Thereafter, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied in the game R19 (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19. Display including images indicating the total number of games in LMT and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “19/20”) Yes. Note that the flow of effects in the game R18 to the game R1 is substantially the same, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state is 0, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R0, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 0. Display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “0/20”) ing.

  After that, since this game R0 is a final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (end effect), the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired, number of games in the AT2 state, etc.) The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display including the image including “0/20”) and the operation navigation display are deleted. ing. The condition for starting the ED effect end screen and the result display is not limited to the case where the third stop operation is accepted, and the effect form of the ED effect end screen and the display content of the result display are not particularly limited.

<Specific example of counter update display / 3 betting game and 2 betting game>
FIG. 53 shows that in the high navigation state, the performance state transitions in the order of AT2 state → judgment state → LMT state (limit state) and then transitions to the normal state in the low navigation state, and three betting games and two betting It is the figure which showed an example of the update display of the counter when performing both games. Note that the description and description of the same effects and display as described in “Specific example of counter update display / only 3 betting game” described with reference to FIG. 52 will be omitted as appropriate (the same applies to the following examples).

  The game R28 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 28 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 2, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R28, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). In addition to executing an AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) Since the count value is 2), the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is executed. .

  The subsequent game R27 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 27, and a game in which two bets are played in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since two betting games were performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

  Therefore, in the game R27, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, since two betting games have been performed in the AT2 state, even when the internal winning combination is given for the push order, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed. In this example, an example in which an AT2 effect is executed even when two betting games are performed in the AT2 state is shown, but there are a plurality of related items in which the AT2 effect is executed over a plurality of games. If two betting games are performed in the AT2 state, the AT2 effect scene may not be updated in the game.

  The game R1 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 1, the remaining number of games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 2, and two betting games have been performed. In this game R1, since two betting games were performed in the LMT state, the remaining number of games in the LMT state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

  Therefore, in the game R1, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the LMT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, while the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) in the LMT state is not executed. Further, since two betting games have been performed in the LMT state, no operation navigation suggesting a stop operation is executed even when the player wins an internal winning combination. In this example, an example is shown in which an ED effect is executed even when two betting games are performed in the LMT state, but there are a plurality of related ED effects that are executed over a plurality of games. If two betting games are performed in the LMT state, the ED effect scene may not be updated in the game.

  In this example, after the first display (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state in this example), the first game (in this example, When the execution of the three-game betting game is started, the specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) is updated to display the second display in the first game (three-game betting game). (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G”) is configured to be displayable.

  On the other hand, after the first display (display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is displayed in the advantageous state (AT2 state), the execution of the second game (in this example, a two-stake betting game) starts. If it is, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated, and the second display (display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G”) is performed in the second game (two betting game). It is configured not to be displayed.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player is being performed. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific example of update display of counter / when judgment effect is not performed>
FIG. 54 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a counter update display when a judge effect is not performed due to a two-sheet betting game.

  The game R27 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 27, and a game in which two bets are played in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since two betting games were performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

  Therefore, in the game R27, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, since two betting games have been performed in the AT2 state, even when the internal winning combination is given for the push order, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed over the period from the game R27 to the game R18, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2. However, since three betting games were performed in the subsequent game R17, the effect state has shifted to the LMT state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state. For this reason, the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state is not executed. In this example, since the AT2 state is changed to the LMT state, the display of the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is not executed.

  The game R17 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 17, the remaining number of games in the LMT state transitioned from the AT2 state is 19, and a game of three bets has been performed. In the game R17, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has been made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed). .

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20 left”) Is displayed).

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state is 2, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R0, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed.

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “2/20”) Is displayed).

  After that, when a certain condition is established in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the remaining number of games in the LMT state (effect state) using the effect image display device 157 Since the count value of the counter is 2 but the final game in the high navigation state, the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, game media) Display of the acquired number of games, the number of games in the AT2 state, etc.), while displaying an image indicating the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, “2/20 more Display of the image including the characters ") and the navigation display.

  In this example, three betting games are performed in the game after shifting to the LMT state, but since two betting games are performed in the immediately preceding AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) Only the remaining number of games in the high navigation state (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is digested. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and a part of the games in the LMT state cannot be digested, and the transition is made to the normal state in the low navigation state.

<Specific example of counter update display / when the judgment effect and ED effect are not performed>
FIG. 54B is a diagram showing an example of a counter update display when the judgment effect and the ED effect are not performed by the two-sheet betting game.

  The game R27 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 27, and a game in which two bets are played in the AT2 state. In this game R27, since two betting games were performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2.

  Therefore, in the game R27, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. Further, since two betting games have been performed in the AT2 state, even when the internal winning combination is given for the push order, the operation navigation suggesting the stop operation is not executed.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed over the period from the game R27 to the game R0, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 2. The production state shifts from the high navigation state to the low navigation state without shifting from the AT2 state to the judge state or the LMT state. For this reason, the judgment effect corresponding to the judge state and the ED effect corresponding to the LMT state are not executed. In this example, since the AT2 state is shifted to the low navigation state, the display of the AT2 end screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state and the display of the judge end screen corresponding to the end of the judge state are not executed.

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 2, and a game in which two bets are played. In this game R0, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used as an opportunity to play the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the effect state counter). Is the final game in the high navigation state, the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is displayed and the high navigation state is displayed. The result display 2 (for example, the display of the number of game media acquired or the number of games in the AT2 state) is executed while the AT2 effect is ended.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed over the period from the game R27 to the game R0, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not consumed, and the high navigation state Only the remaining number of games (count value of the high navigation state counter) is consumed. As a result, the transition to the normal state of the low navigation state is not performed without shifting to the judgment state or the LMT state in the high navigation state, and all the games in the LMT state (20 games in this example) cannot be digested. Yes.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production>
Next, specific examples of the ED effect, the freeze effect, and the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 to FIG. 58 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect aspects of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / only 3 betting games>
FIG. 55 shows the ED when only the three-sheet betting game is performed in the high navigation state when the performance state shifts in the order of the judgment state → LMT state (limit state) and then the normal state of the low navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of production | presentation and freeze production.

  The game R19 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 19, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state that has shifted from the judge state is 19, and a game of three bets has been performed. In this game R19, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), a freeze effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3”) indicating a stop operation is started. Display), the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number in the LMT state A display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the characters “20/20 left” are included) Running the display) of the image.

  Thereafter, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied in the game R19 (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19. Display including images indicating the total number of games in LMT and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “19/20”) Yes. In addition, since the flow of the effects of the subsequent game R18 to game R2 is substantially the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R1 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 1, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state is 1, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R1, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 1. Display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters 1/20) ing. Further, in the game R1, by using the effect image display device 157, a setting suggestion effect (setting value can be estimated) that suggests a setting value (setting 1 to setting 6) indicated by a symbol A or “suggestion A” in the drawing. Production). The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap a part of the ED effect.

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state is 0, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R0, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 0. Display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “0/20”) ing.

  After that, since this game R0 is a final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (display of the image including the characters “0/20” in the present example) and the operation navigation display are deleted. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) that suggests a set value, which is indicated by a symbol B or “suggest B” in the figure. . The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a part of the background display. Also, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and suggestion A and suggestion B may be performed simultaneously in the final game in the LMT state.

<Examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / three-sheet betting game and two-sheet betting game>
FIG. 56 (a) shows a three-wager game and two-wager betting when the performance state shifts in the order of the judgment state → LMT state (limit state) in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state. It is the figure which showed an example of ED effect and freeze effect when performing a game.

  The game R19 is a game with 19 remaining games in the high navigation state, and a game in which two bets are played in the judge state. In this game R19, since two betting games were performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated, but remains at 4.

  For this reason, in the game R19, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. For this reason, while the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state is executed, the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the judgment state (the count value of the production state counter) is not updated. In the game R19, the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 19, which satisfies the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but this is a two betting game. Therefore, ED production and freeze production are not executed.

  In this example, an example is shown in which a judge effect is executed even when two betting games are performed in the judge state. However, there are a plurality of related cases in which the judge effect is executed over a plurality of games. If two betting games are performed in the judge state, the scene of the judge effect may not be updated in the game.

  The following game R18 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 18 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state that has shifted from the judge state is 19, and a game in which three bets have been played. In this game R18, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the freeze effect is started and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3”) indicating a stop operation is started. Display).

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20 left”) Is displayed).

  Thereafter, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied in the game R18 (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 19. The number of games in the state (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is 18, but a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) In the example, display of an image including the characters “19/20 after” is executed. Note that the flow of effects in the subsequent game R17 to game R1 is substantially the same, so the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state is 1, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R0, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed.

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 1. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters 1/20) Is displayed). In the game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) that indicates a set value, which is indicated by a symbol A or “suggest A” in the drawing. . The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed so as to overlap a part of the ED effect.

  After that, since this game R0 is a final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (display of an image including the characters “1/20” in this example) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) that suggests a set value, which is indicated by a symbol B or “suggest B” in the figure. . The effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is executed in a part of the background display. In addition, the display timing of the ED effect end screen is not limited to this example, and the display may be started when other conditions such as acceptance of a pressing operation of the start lever 135 are satisfied.

  In this example, execution of a specific effect (ED effect in this example) can be started in an advantageous state (in this example, an LMT state), and certain requirements are satisfied at the start of game execution. In this case (in this example, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes 20G), when the game is the first game (three betting games in this example), a specific count value (this book In the example, the high navigation state counter) is updated so that execution of a specific effect (ED effect) can be started in the first game (three-game betting game).

  On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the game execution (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes 20G), the game is the second game (in this example, two betting games). In this case, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated, and the execution of the specific effect (ED effect) is not started in the second game (three-game betting game). For this reason, it is possible to notify in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player is being performed. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In this example, it is configured to be able to start execution of a certain freeze effect in an advantageous state (in this example, LMT state), and when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of game execution (in this example, high In the case where the number of remaining games in the navigation state is 20G) and the game is the first game (three-game betting game in this example), a specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state counter) ) Is updated so that execution of a freeze effect can be started in the first game (three-game betting game).

  On the other hand, when a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the game execution (when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes 20G), the game is the second game (in this example, two betting games). In this case, the specific count value (high navigation state counter) is updated so that execution of a certain freeze effect is not started in the second game (three-game betting game). For this reason, it is possible to notify in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player is being performed. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In this example, the game after the transition to the LMT state is a 3-bet game, but since the 2-bet game is performed in the previous judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (effects) Only the remaining number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is consumed without digesting the count value of the state counter). As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is delayed, and a part of the games in the LMT state cannot be digested, and the transition is made to the normal state in the low navigation state.

  FIG. 56 (b) is a diagram showing a modification of the setting suggestion effect described with reference to FIG. 56 (a). In this example, in the game R19, the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 19, and in the game R18, the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 18, and the conditions for transition from the judge state to the LMT state, respectively. (The remaining number of games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but since it is a two betting game, the ED effect and the freeze effect are not executed.

  In addition, since two betting games are performed in two games of the game R19 and the game R18 in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not consumed, and high navigation. Only the remaining number of games in the state (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is consumed, and the number of games in the LMT state is 18. For this reason, the setting suggestion effect (suggest A) executed in response to the 19th game in the LMT state is not executed, and the ED effect of the final game in the high navigation state (the LMT state when shifting to the LMT state). Only the setting suggestion effect (suggest B) that is executed when the end screen is displayed is executed.

<Examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / two-sheet betting game only>
FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of the setting suggestion effect when the two-sheet betting game is continued in the judgment state of the high navigation state.

  The games R25 to R19 are games in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 25 to 19, and two bets are played in the judge state. In the period of the game R25 to the game R19, since two betting games were performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains 9.

  For this reason, in the game R25 to the game R19, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. Since it is in the state, while the judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed, the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated. In the game R19, the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 19, which satisfies the condition for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is less than 20G), but this is a two betting game. Therefore, ED production and freeze production are not executed.

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the remaining number of games in the judge state is 9, and a game in which two bets are played. In this game R0, the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). The judge effect corresponding to the judge state is executed.

  After that, since this game R0 is a final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), While the display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state is executed, the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, the display of the number of games acquired and the number of games in the AT2 state) is executed while the judgment state The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (display of the image including the characters “LAST 9G” in this example) and the display of the judge effect are deleted. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) that suggests a set value, which is indicated by a symbol B or “suggest B” in the figure. .

  In this example, since two betting games are continued in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the performance state counter) is not consumed from the remaining nine games, and the remaining in the high navigation state Only the number of games (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is digested. As a result, the transition to the LMT state in the high navigation state is not performed, and the transition to the normal state in the low navigation state is made without being able to digest all the games in the LMT state.

  In addition, since the transition to the LMT state is not performed, the setting suggestion effect (suggestion A) that is executed in response to the 19th game in the LMT state is not executed, and the high navigation state (when the transition to the LMT state is performed). Only the setting suggestion effect (suggest B) that is executed in response to the display of the ED effect end screen of the final game in the LMT state) is executed.

<Specific examples of ED production, freeze production, and setting suggestion production / variation examples of freeze production>
FIG. 58A and FIG. 58B are diagrams showing an example of a modified example of the freeze effect. In the present example, another freeze effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “second freeze effect”) different from the freeze effect that is executed simultaneously with the ED effect is configured to be executable.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a second freeze effect in the case where a three-sheet betting game is performed. The game R327 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 327 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 31, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R327, an effect for managing the number of games up to the game to start the second freeze effect is triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the start condition of the linked effect is satisfied). Start counting of the start counter.

  The game R325 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 325 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 229, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R327, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the three-wager game is started and the effect start counter that has started counting in the game R327 reaches a certain value), The linked effect executed over the game R327 to the game R326 is ended (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect.

  In this example, since the addition of 200G AT was performed in the game R325, after the second freeze effect is finished, an image including the number of AT additional games is displayed (in this example, “+ 200G!”). Display of the image including the character of the display), and when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Since it is in the AT2 state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 229. Display including an image indicating (value) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 229G”) is executed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 58 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a second freeze effect when a betting game is performed in the middle of the AT2 state. The game R325 in this example is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 325 and two betting games are performed. In this game R325, since two betting games were performed in the AT2 state, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 30.

  Therefore, in the game R325, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, while the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is not updated.

  The subsequent game R324 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 324, the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 229, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R324, triggered by the fact that a certain condition has been established (in this example, the three-wager betting game has started and the effect start counter that started counting in the game R327 has reached a certain value) The interlocked effect executed over the games R327 to R325 is ended (or interrupted), and the second freeze effect is started without executing the ED effect. The flow of effects after the second freeze effect is the same as the flow of effects of the game R325 in FIG.

<Specific example of ED production in non-AT state>
Next, a specific example of the ED effect in the non-AT state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 to FIG. 60 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect aspects of effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect when a three-sheet betting game is performed. The game R550 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 550, the remaining number of games in the AT1 state that has shifted from the normal state is 19, and three betting games have been performed. In this game R550, the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). In addition to executing an AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state, an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3”) indicating a stop operation is performed, and the remaining number of games in the AT1 state (effect state counter) Since the count value of 19 is 19, display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 19G”) is executed. .

  The game R50 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 50 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state, which has shifted from the AT1 state, is 24, and three bets have been played. In this game R50, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). In addition to executing an AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) Since the count value is 24, the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 24G”) is executed. .

  The game R19 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 19, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state transitioned from the AT2 state is 19, and a game of three bets has been performed. In this game R19, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition has been made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) is executed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the effect state counter) Display (in this example, display of an image including characters “20/20 more”) is executed.

  The game R1 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 1, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state is 1, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R1, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 1. Display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters 1/20) ing. Further, in the game R1, a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) indicated by a symbol A or “suggest A” in the drawing is executed using the effect image display device 157. .

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state is 0, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R0, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 0. Display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “0/20”) ing.

  After that, since this game R0 is a final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (display of the image including the characters “0/20” in the present example) and the operation navigation display are deleted. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) that suggests a set value, which is indicated by a symbol B or “suggest B” in the figure. .

  FIG. 60 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect in the case of shifting to the LMT state after performing two betting games in the normal state. The games R900 to R18 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 900 to 18 and are in a normal state, and are games in which two bets are played. In games R19 to R18, the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 19 to 18 and satisfies the conditions for transition from the judge state to the LMT state (the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is less than 20G). Because it is a game, ED production and freeze production are not executed.

  The subsequent game R17 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 17, the remaining number of games in the LMT state shifted from the normal state is 19, and a game of three bets has been performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition from the normal state to the LMT state, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3”) indicating a stop operation is started. Display).

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20 left”) Is displayed).

  Thereafter, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157, triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied in the game R17 (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 19. The number of games in the state (the count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but a display including the image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) In the example, display of an image including the characters “19/20 after” is executed. In addition, since the flow of the effects of the subsequent game R16 to game R1 is substantially the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state is 2, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R0, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed.

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 0, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 2. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “2/20”) Is displayed).

  After that, since this game R0 is a final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state (end effect relating to the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) A display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “2/20”) Display) and navigation navigation display are cleared. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) that suggests a set value, which is indicated by a symbol B or “suggest B” in the figure. .

  In this example, in the advantageous state (in this example, the high navigation state), the first advantageous gaming state (in this example, the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is configured to be transferred. An end effect (in this example, display of an ED effect end screen) related to the end of the state (AT2 state (= high navigation state)) can be executed, and the first game ( In this example, when only 3 betting games) are performed, the end effect may be executed by shifting to the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state). When only the second game (two betting games in this example) is performed in the (high navigation state), the end effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state (AT2 state). It is comprised so that.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player is being performed. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is played. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to carefully select the number of game media bets in subsequent games.

  In this example, the normal state is changed to the LMT state without changing to the state other than the LMT state (AT1 state, AT2 state, etc.). Production is being performed.

  FIG. 60B is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect in the case where two betting games are continued in the normal state.

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the remaining number of games in the normal state is 0, and a game in which two bets are played. In this game R0, the effect state is the normal state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). The normal production corresponding to the normal state is executed.

  After that, since a certain condition is satisfied in this game R0 (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted), it is the final game in the high navigation state using the effect image display device 157. The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state is executed, and the result display 2 in the high navigation state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired, etc.) is executed, while the display of the normal effect is displayed. Erasing. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) that suggests a set value, which is indicated by a symbol B or “suggest B” in the figure. .

  In this example, in the high navigation state, the state is shifted to the low navigation state without shifting to a state other than the normal state (such as the AT1 state and the AT2 state), but the ED effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed.

<Specific example of ED production during BB internal selection>
Next, a specific example of an ED effect during BB internal winning will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects, and shows the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

  FIG. 61A shows an example of an ED effect performed after the BB game. In order to avoid redundant description, only the effects different from the effects described with reference to FIG. 59 will be described.

  Game R580 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 580 and BB is internally won in the normal state. In this game R580, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a bet operation is accepted), the effect state is the normal state using the effect image display device 157. A corresponding normal effect is executed, and a BB confirmation effect (in this example, an image including the characters “bonus confirmation!”) Indicating the internal winning of the BB is executed.

  After that, when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R580 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the stop operation related to the BB winning is suggested using the effect image display device 157. Operation navigation (in this example, navigation indicating that the symbol combination “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” corresponding to BB (bonus combination) is aimed) is executed.

  The subsequent game R579 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 579 and the BB is won in the normal state. In this game R579, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the symbol combination “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” corresponding to BB is stopped and displayed on the winning line), the effect image display is performed. The device 157 is used to start a BB effect that notifies the start of the BB game.

  FIG. 61 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect performed during the internal winning of BB. In order to avoid redundant description, only the effects different from the effects described with reference to FIG. 61B will be described.

  The game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0 and the BB is being won internally. Since this game R0 is the final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted), the LMT The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the state (the end effect relating to the end of the AT2 state (= high navigation state)) is executed, and the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media, etc.) Is running.

  Further, in this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to operate the operation navigation that suggests the stop operation related to the BB winning (in this example, the symbol combination “Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 1” corresponding to BB (bonus role). "Navi that suggests aiming at" is continuously displayed, and a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) indicated by the symbol B or "suggest B" in the figure is executed. .

  In this example, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (a certain gaming state) (in this example, an AT2 state) in an advantageous state (in this example, a high navigation state). An effect related to the end (end effect) (in this example, the display of the ED effect end screen) is configured to be executable, and in an advantageous state (high navigation state), the game state (AT2 state) is shifted to an end effect. (ED display end screen display) is configured to be able to start, and when a game is played in an advantageous state (high navigation state) and an internal winning special role, the advantageous state ( In the high navigation state, the execution of the end effect (display of the ED effect end screen) can be started without shifting to a certain game state (AT2 state).

  For this reason, even if the advantageous state ends without being able to arrange the symbols related to the special role, it makes the player feel like having shifted to a certain advantageous gaming state, thereby reducing the player's disappointing feeling and impatience. It becomes possible. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

<Specific examples of linked production>
Next, a specific example of the interlocking effect will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 62 to FIG. 63 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect aspects of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of the interlocking effects in time series.

<Specific example of linked production / when linked production proceeds normally>
FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the linked effects normally proceed.
Here, the interlocking effect refers to an effect composed of a plurality of scenes having relevance (story characteristics) and executed over a plurality of games. There are no particular restrictions on the mode of effect of the interlocking effect, but the interlocking effect (normal pattern) of this example is the “enemy selection” scene indicated by symbol N, “enemy determination” indicated by symbol N + 1, as shown in FIG. , Confrontation ”scene,“ enemy attack ”scene indicated by symbol N + 2,“ friend attack ”scene indicated by symbol N + 3 →“ victory (or defeat) ”scene indicated by symbol N + 4, and the like.

  Returning to FIG. 62, the game R90 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 90 and the remaining number of games in the judge state is 9, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R90, an “enemy selection” scene is executed as one scene of the linked effects. Although illustration is omitted, in the subsequent game R89 to game R85, three betting games were performed, so one scene of linked effects is executed in each game, and the linked effects normally proceed.

  The subsequent games R86 to R83 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 86 to 83, and the remaining number of games in the judge state is 5 to 2, and a game in which three bets are played. During the period from game R86 to game R83, as the continuation of the linked production, the “enemy decision, confrontation” scene → the “enemy attack” scene → the “friend attack” scene → the “victory” scene are executed in this order. The linked production is executed until the last scene.

<Specific example of linked production / when linked production does not proceed normally>
FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the linked effects do not normally proceed.
The game R86 to the game R85 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the remaining number of games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and three bets are played. In the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as an interlocking effect, an “enemy decision, confrontation” scene → an “enemy attack” scene is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect proceeds normally.

  The following game R84 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 84, and two betting games are played in the judge state. In this game R84, since two betting games were performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

  Therefore, in the game R84, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. Therefore, while executing the judge effect corresponding to the judge state, the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the characters “LAST 4G” are included. Display) is not updated. Furthermore, since two betting games were performed during the linked production in the judge state, the “enemy attack” scene executed in the previous game R85 is executed again without proceeding with the linked production scene. Therefore, in this example, the same “enemy attack” scene is executed in duplicate in both the game R85 and the game R84, and the linked effect does not normally proceed. However, in the subsequent games R83 to R82, three betting games were performed. Therefore, during the period of the games R83 to R82, as a continuation of the linked production, the “ally attack” scene → the “win” scene Are executed in this order, and the linked production is executed until the last scene.

  In this example, a certain effect (first effect) (in this example, a judge effect) can be executed over a plurality of games, and the first effect (judge effect) is the first scene. (In this example, the scene of “enemy attack”) and the second scene (in this example, “team attack” scene), the first scene (“enemy attack” scene) If the execution of the first game (three-game betting game in this example) is started after the game in which the game has been performed, the second scene ("Allies" in the first game (three-game betting game) is started. The execution of the “attack” scene) can be started, and after the game in which the first scene (“enemy attack” scene) is performed, the second game (two in this example) When the execution of the betting game is started, the second scene (“ally attack”) in the second game (two betting game) Execution of the effect of the scene) is configured so as not to start.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player is being performed.

FIG. 63 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of the effect when the ED effect is started without the interlocking effect normally proceeding.
The game R86 to the game R85 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the remaining number of games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and three bets are played. In the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as an interlocking effect, an “enemy decision, confrontation” scene → an “enemy attack” scene is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect proceeds normally.

  The subsequent games R84 to R18 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 84 to 18 and two betting games are performed in the judge state. In the period from the game R84 to the game R18, since two betting games were performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains four.

  For this reason, in the game R84 to the game R18, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. Since it is in the state, while executing the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the judgment state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, “LAST 4G”) (Display including characters) is not updated. Furthermore, since two betting games were performed during the linked production in the judge state, the “enemy attack” scene executed in the previous game R85 is continuously executed without proceeding with the linked production scene. . Accordingly, in this example, the same “enemy attack” scene is executed in duplicate during the period of the game R85 to the game R18, and the interlocking effect does not normally proceed.

  The following game R17 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 17, the remaining number of games in the LMT state shifted from the judge state is 19, and a game with three bets has been performed. In this game R17, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the ED effect is started, and at the same time, the effect state is displayed using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition from the judge state to the LMT state, the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started and an operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3”) indicating a stop operation is started. Display).

  On the other hand, the number of games in the high navigation state (count value of the high navigation state counter) is 17, but the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Therefore, a display including an image indicating the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “20/20 left”) Is displayed).

  In this example, since the same “enemy attack” scene was executed repeatedly in the period of game R85 to game R18, and the linked effect did not proceed normally, the game R17 shifted to the LMT state and the ED effect was performed. The linked production has not been executed until the last scene (in this example, the “victory” or “defeated” scene of the linked production that functions as a notice of the subsequent game).

  FIG. 63 (b) is a diagram showing an example of an interlocking effect in the case where two betting games are continued in the judge state.

  The game R86 to the game R85 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 86 to 85 and the remaining number of games in the judge state is 5 to 4, and three bets are played. In the period from the game R86 to the game R85, as an interlocking effect, an “enemy decision, confrontation” scene → an “enemy attack” scene is executed in this order, and the interlocking effect proceeds normally.

  The subsequent games R84 to R1 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 84 to 1 and two betting games are performed in the judge state. In the period from the game R84 to the game R1, since two betting games were performed in the judge state, the remaining number of games in the judge state (counter value of the effect state counter) is not updated and remains at 4.

  For this reason, in the game R84 to the game R1, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157. Since it is in the state, while executing the judgment effect corresponding to the judgment state, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the judgment state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, “LAST 4G”) (Display including characters) is not updated.

  Furthermore, since two betting games were performed during the linked production in the judge state, the “enemy attack” scene executed in the previous game R85 is continuously executed without proceeding with the linked production scene. . Therefore, in this example, in the period of the game R85 to the game R1, as shown in FIG. 64B, the same “enemy attack” scene is executed repeatedly, and the interlocking effect does not normally proceed. For this reason, the player can easily notice that the player has bet two cards by watching the progress of the linked performance.

  The subsequent game R0 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 0, and the remaining number of games in the judge state is 4, and a game in which two bets are played. This game R0 is a final game in a high navigation state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). The display of the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the high navigation state is executed, and the result display 2 in the high navigation state (for example, display of the number of game media acquired, etc.) is executed while the display of the judge effect is displayed. Is erased. In this game R0, the effect image display device 157 is used to execute a setting suggestion effect (effect that can be used to guess the set value) that suggests a set value, which is indicated by a symbol B or “suggest B” in the figure. .

  In this example, since the same “enemy attack” scene was executed repeatedly in the period of game R85 to game R1 and the linked effect did not normally proceed, the high navigation state ended in game R0 and the ED effect. Is started, and the linked production has not been executed until the last scene (in this example, the “victory” or “defeated” scene of the linked production that functions as a notice of the subsequent game). For this reason, the player can easily notice that the player has bet two cards by watching the progress of the linked performance.

  FIG. 64B to FIG. 64D are diagrams showing modified examples of the interlocking effects. The interlocking effects according to the present invention are not limited to the interlocking effects described with reference to FIG. 64 (A). For example, as shown by the symbol N in FIG. 64 (B), the “enemy selection” scene and the “enemy determination” , “Confrontation” may be composed of one scene.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64C, a scene of “enemy attack and ally attack” is newly added, and as shown by reference numeral N + 1 in FIG. 64C, a scene of “enemy attack and ally attack”. The “enemy attack” scene is composed of one scene, or the “enemy attack and ally attack” scene and the “friendly attack” scene are composed of one scene as indicated by the symbol N + 2 in FIG. May be.

  In addition, after executing the “enemy attack and ally attack” scene composed of one scene as indicated by reference numeral N + 1 in FIG. 64D, one scene is displayed as indicated by reference numeral N + 2 in FIG. 64D. A plurality of “enemy attack” scenes may be executed.

  Moreover, according to the kind of the interlocking production shown to FIG. 64 (A)-the same figure (D), you may change the privilege content provided to a player, or you may vary expectations. In addition, even when two betting games are performed, all scenes may be executed in a certain aspect of the linked performance, and when two betting games are performed, (Or the last scene that suggests a judge result (eg, a “win” or “defeat” scene) may not be played.

<Specific display example>
Next, specific examples of specific display will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 65 to FIG. 66 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect aspects of effects to be executed in association with the timing charts. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the specific display in time series.

<Specific example of specific indication / Three betting games when shifting to judge>
FIG. 65 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a three-wager game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

  The game R82 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 82 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 1, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R82, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). , An AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state (for example, an effect indicated by the symbol d1 in FIG. 67 (A) where the character is running) and an operation navigation indicating a stop operation (in this example, “2 -1-3 ") is executed, and since the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 1, an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) is included. Display (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G”) is executed.

  In the game R82, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state (in the example indicated by reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67A, the characters “GET 1320” are included). Display), and when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted), it is suggested that the third stop operation has been accepted using the effect image display device 157 Effect (for example, the effect of darkening the entire screen, indicated by reference sign d1 ′ in FIG. 67A).

  The following game R81 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 81 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 0, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R81, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as the game R82, while a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state (in this example, (Displaying an image including the characters “LAST 0G”).

  Also, in this game R81, it is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted). , The AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state (for example, the background image including the character “END” indicated by the symbol d2 in FIG. 67A) is displayed and the result display 1 in the AT2 state ( For example, an image indicating the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is displayed while executing the display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state (indicated by reference sign d2 in FIG. 67A). The display including the display (displaying the image including the characters “LAST 0G” in this example) and the display of the operation navigation are erased. In this example, the display of the AT2 end effect screen is executed in the final game in the AT2 state, but it may be executed at other timing (for example, after shifting to the judge state).

  The subsequent game R80 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 80, the remaining number of games in the judge state that has shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a game of three bets has been performed. In this game R80, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after a BET or the like)), the effect state is judged from the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition to the state has started, the judgment production corresponding to the start of the judgment state is started and the remaining number of games in the judgment state (the count value of the production state counter) is 10. Display (in this example, display of an image including characters “defeat within 10G”).

  Thereafter, the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied in the game R80 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). From this, the judgment effect corresponding to the judge state is executed and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 9, so that the image showing the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, an image including the characters “LAST 9G” is displayed).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 67 (A), an example of a judgment effect executed in the game R80 will be described. In this example, when a press operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, a judgment effect start screen indicated by a symbol d3 is displayed, and when a first stop operation is accepted in the game, a judge effect indicated by a symbol d4 (linked effect) When the third stop operation is received in the game, the judgment effect indicated by the symbol d4 ′ is executed. When a certain period of time has elapsed since the third stop operation was received in the game, in which the “enemy selection” scene, which is one of the linked effects, is an effect indicating that an enemy has been selected. In addition, a judgment effect indicated by reference sign d4 ″ (an “enemy selection” scene that is one scene of the interlocking effect and an effect indicating that the enemy has been confirmed) is executed.

<Specific display example / Two betting games at the time of transition to judge>
FIG. 65 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a two-game betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. Note that the flow of effects in the game R82 to the game R81 and the game R79 is substantially the same as the effect described with reference to FIG.

  The game R80 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 80 and two betting games have been played. In this game R80, since two betting games have been performed in the judge state, a display including an image showing a judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. Without being performed, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to perform a specific display (in this example, black-colored). Display including only the background image).

  Here, the “specific display (specific display)” refers to a display that is not related to the advantageous state, for example, a display that is displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state) (for example, A display different from any one of the displays corresponding to the second advantageous game state (for example, the judge state) (for example, the judge effect) corresponds to the display of the AT2 end screen). Note that the display mode of the specific display is not particularly limited. For example, it is a display of an image including a certain character (in this example, the character “in preparation for production”) indicated by a symbol d5 in FIG. Alternatively, the display may be a pattern or a figure.

  In this example, a 3-bet game is performed after a 2-bet game in the judge state. However, if the 2-bet game is continued, there are certain conditions in the 2-bet game. A specific display is displayed using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the establishment (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). In this case, the display of the AT2 end screen may be executed until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). With such a configuration, even when the specific display is displayed, the player can grasp the end of the AT2 state, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Specific example of specific display / variation example of 3 betting game at the time of transition to judge>
FIG. 66 (a) is a diagram showing a modified example of the flow of effects when a three-bet game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state.

  The game R81 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 81 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state is 0, and a game in which three bets are played. In the game R81, as in the game R82, the AT2 effect (for example, the effect that the character is running as indicated by the symbol d1 in FIG. 67 (A)) and the operation navigation are executed, while the AT2 state A display including an image indicating the remaining number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “LAST 0G”) is executed.

  Further, in this game R81, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state (in the example indicated by reference numeral d1 in FIG. 67 (A), the characters “GET 1320” are included). Display) and using the effect image display device 157 as a trigger when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted). While displaying the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state (for example, the background image including the character “end” indicated by the symbol d2 in FIG. 67A), the result display 1 in the AT2 state is displayed. Not running.

  The subsequent game R80 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 80, the remaining number of games in the judge state that has shifted from the AT2 state is 9, and a game of three bets has been performed. In this game R80, a result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, a display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state indicated by reference numeral d2 in FIG. 67A, a display including the characters “GET 1328”) is executed. is doing.

<Specific example of specific display / Two-bet betting game at the time of transition to judge>
FIG. 66 (b) is a diagram showing a modified example of the flow of effects when a two-game betting game is performed when the effect state shifts from the AT2 state to the judge state in the high navigation state. Note that the flow of effects of the game R81 is substantially the same as the effects described with reference to FIG.

  The game R80 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 80 and two betting games have been played. In this game R80, since two betting games have been performed in the judge state, a display including an image showing a judge effect corresponding to the judge state and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. Without being performed, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to perform a specific display (in this example, black-colored). Display including only the background image).

  In the game R81, the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, the symbol d2 in FIG. 67B) is triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). The display of the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state shown, including the characters “GET 1326 (because of winning by winning two, 1328-2)” is executed.

  In this example, in the advantageous state (high navigation state in this example), it is possible to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) and the second advantageous gaming state (in this example, the judge state). The first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is more advantageous for the player than the second advantageous gaming state (judgement state), and the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) is After finishing, the display means (in this example, the effect image display device 157) is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state (judgment state), and the first display (in this example, the AT2 end screen) ), A second display (in this example, a judgment effect), and a third display (in this example, a specific display (a display including only a black background image)) is a means capable of displaying the first display The display shows the end of the first advantageous gaming state (AT2 state). The second display is a display corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (judgement state), and the third display is a specification not related to the advantageous state (high navigation state). When the execution of the first game (three-game betting game in this example) is started after the first display is displayed, a specific count value (in this example, the high navigation state) The counter) is updated so that the second display can be displayed in the first game, and after the first display is displayed, the second game (in this example, two betting games) is executed. When is started, a specific count value (in this example, a high navigation state counter) is updated so that the third display can be displayed in the game.

  For this reason, it is possible to notify in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player is being performed. Since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. Further, it is possible to entertain the game in the next game state comfortably while the first game is being performed correctly.

  67A to 67D are diagrams showing specific examples of the flow of effects including specific display. In the above embodiment, the effects of FIGS. (A) and (B) are mainly applied. However, the interlocked effects according to the present invention are not limited to these effects. For example, FIG. As indicated by reference numeral d6 in FIG. 4D, instead of displaying the number of game media acquired in the high navigation state, the number of game media acquired in a certain effect state (AT2 state in this example) is displayed. Also good.

<Specific examples of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter>
Next, a specific example of updating the ceiling counter and the promotion counter will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 74 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, respectively, and show the effect modes of the effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

  Here, the item “ceiling counter” in each figure indicates the number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached. In addition, “promotion counter”, “AT1 type”, “judge mode”, and “final notification flag” in each figure indicate variables, flags, etc. (internal information of the slot machine) in the above-described various flowcharts, respectively. In addition, the item of “condition device” in each figure is the condition device No. in FIG. (Number).

<Examples of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When reaching the ceiling with a 3-wager game>
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when three games are played in the high navigation state, reach the ceiling, and the effect state transitions in the order of normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state.

  The game R300 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 300 and the remaining number of games in the normal state is 4, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (in this example, 0), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and a sign effect that suggests the transition to the AT1 state as a normal effect. Has started. In addition, in the normal state processing A described with reference to FIG. 19, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), the AT1 type lottery is performed and the AT1 winning flag is turned on. It is set and preparations are made to shift the production state to the AT1 state. Although not shown, in the subsequent game R299 to game R297 period, the sign effect is continued as the normal effect.

  The following game R296 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 296 and the remaining number of games in the normal state is 0, and a game in which three bets are played. In this game R296, since the production state counter has become 0 in the normal state (because the normal state has ended), the production state is prepared to shift from the normal state to the final notification state, and as a normal production , The precursor effect suggesting the transition to the AT1 state is executed.

  The subsequent game R295 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 295 and is in a final announcement state immediately after the transition from the normal state, and is a game in which three bets are played. In this game R295, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters “bonus confirmation!”) For notifying the transition to the AT1 state (in this example, a pseudo bonus) is executed. Also, in this game R295, since the AT1 type is low in the final notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and whether or not the AT1 type is promoted is determined. After the determination, in the fixed notification state processing B described with reference to FIG. 29, processing for setting the fixed notification flag from off to on is performed.

  The subsequent game R294 is a game of the second game in the final announcement state with 294 remaining games in the high navigation state, and is a game in which three bets are played. In this game R294, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters “bonus confirmation!”) Is continued as a normal effect. In the game R294, since the AT1 type is low in the final notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and whether or not the AT1 type is promoted is determined. After that, display related to the AT1 type promotion lottery (promotional lottery display) is performed.

  Furthermore, in this game R294, since the final notification flag is on in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the conditional device is the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 3 in this example) related to the AT1 type. No. 4) is determined. In this example, the condition device is No. Since it was 5, the production state is maintained in the final notification state.

  The subsequent game R293 is the third game in the final announcement state with 293 remaining games in the high navigation state, and is a game in which three bets are played. In this game R293, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters “bonus confirmation!”) Is continued as a normal effect. In the game R293, since the AT1 type is low in the final notification state process A described with reference to FIG. 20, a promotion counter addition lottery is performed, and whether or not the AT1 type is promoted is determined. Is going.

  Furthermore, in this game R293, since the final notification flag is on in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the conditional device is the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 3 in this example) related to the AT1 type. No. 4) is determined. In this example, the condition device is No. Therefore, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that promotes the reverse push operation targeting the symbol of Seven 1 or 7) is executed, and preparation for shifting the production state from the final notification state to the AT1 state is performed. Is going.

  The subsequent game R292 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 292, the remaining number of games in the AT1 state that has shifted from the final notification state is 20, and three bets have been played. In this game R292, the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a BET operation has been performed). And an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed), and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter before subtraction) Since the count value of 20 is 20, display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (display of an image including the characters “20G” in this example) is executed.

<Examples of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / when the two-wager game does not reach the ceiling>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects in the case where two betting games are performed in the high navigation state and the effect state is maintained in the normal state without reaching the ceiling.

  In this example, since the two betting game is continued in the game after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the ceiling counter is not subtracted. For this reason, in the normal state process A described with reference to FIG. 19, it is not determined that the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (in this example, 0), and the effect state shifts to the AT1 state. There is nothing. In addition, since the effect state counter in the normal state is not updated in the two-wager game, it is not determined that the effect state counter has become 0 in the normal state process B described with reference to FIG. The production state does not become the final notification state.

  That is, in this example, a certain second counter (in this example, a ceiling counter) different from the first counter (in this example, the high navigation state counter) relating to the advantageous state (in this example, the high navigation state). Each time a game is played in an advantageous state (high navigation state), a certain count value of the second counter (ceiling counter) can be updated. When the value (0 in this example) is reached, it is configured to shift to a specific advantageous state (AT1 state in this example) that is advantageous to the player. When one game (three-game betting game in this example) is performed, both the specific count value (high navigation state counter value) and a certain count value (ceiling counter value) are counted. The value is configured to be updatable and is in an advantageous state ( When a second game (in this example, two betting games) is performed in the (navigation state), a specific count value (high navigation state counter value) and a certain count value (ceiling counter value) Of these, only the specific count value (the value of the high navigation state counter) can be updated.

  For this reason, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by preferentially treating the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

<Examples of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When reaching the ceiling with a 3-wager game and 2-wager game>
FIG. 70 shows an example of the flow of production when the three-game and two-game betting games are performed in the high navigation state, the ceiling is reached, and the production state transitions in the order of normal state → final notification state → AT1 state. It is a figure.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two betting games (in this example, the game from the game next to the game R999 is started). In the period of 100 games up to R899), the ceiling counter is not subtracted. For this reason, in the subsequent games after game R898, the three-wager game is performed and the ceiling counter is subtracted. However, the example of the effect described with reference to FIG. The number of games until reaching the ceiling is delayed by 100 games as compared to (arrival), and the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 200, reaching the ceiling. In addition, since the flow of the production in the case of transition from the normal state to the final notification state to the AT1 state is the same as that in the other embodiments, the description thereof is omitted.

<Updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When shifting to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a three-game and a two-game betting game are performed in the high navigation state and the state shifts to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two betting games (in this example, the game from the game next to the game R999 is started). In the period up to the game before R20), the ceiling counter is not subtracted. For this reason, in the game after the subsequent game R19, three betting games are performed. However, compared to the example of the effect described with reference to FIG. 68 (the remaining number of games in the high navigation state reaches 300, the ceiling reaches the ceiling) The number of games until reaching the ceiling is delayed, and the state has shifted to the LMT state without reaching the ceiling (the ceiling counter does not become 0). In addition, since the flow of effects when shifting from the normal state to the LMT state is the same as that in the other embodiments, the description thereof is omitted.

<Specific example of update of ceiling counter and promotion counter / When shifting to a low navigation state without reaching the ceiling>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a three-game game and a two-game betting game are performed in the high navigation state and the state shifts to the low navigation state without reaching the ceiling.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed in a plurality of games after the ceiling counter reaches 699, the period of the two betting games (in this example, the game from the game next to the game R999 is started). In the period up to R0), the ceiling counter is not subtracted. Therefore, the number of games until reaching the ceiling is delayed as compared with the example of production described with reference to FIG. 68 (the number of remaining games in the high navigation state reaches 300.) without reaching the ceiling. (The ceiling counter does not become 0), the high navigation state ends in the normal state, and the state shifts to the low navigation state.

  Note that the flow of performance when the normal state of the high navigation state is shifted to the normal state of the low navigation state is the same as that of the other embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted, but FIG. 60B is used. As described above, in this example, in the high navigation state, the state is shifted to the low navigation state without shifting to a state other than the normal state (such as the AT1 state or the AT2 state), but the ED effect or the setting suggestion effect is executed. ing.

<Specific examples of updating the ceiling counter and promotion counter / When the promotion counter is not updated>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when a three-game and a two-game betting game are performed in the final announcement state in the high navigation state and the promotion counter is not updated.

  In this example, since two betting games are performed in a plurality of games in the final announcement state in which the production state has shifted from the normal state, the period of the two betting game (in this example, the next game R294 In the period from the game to the game R270), the promotion counter is not subtracted. For this reason, the number of games until the transition from the confirmed notification state to the AT1 state is delayed compared to the production example described with reference to FIG. 68 (the remaining number of games in the high navigation state reaches the ceiling at 300). After the display related to the type of promotion lottery (promotional lottery display) is performed over a plurality of game periods (in this example, the period from game R294 to game R270), the state is shifted to the AT1 state. In addition, since the flow of the production in the case of shifting from the fixed notification state to the AT1 state is the same as that in the other embodiments, the description thereof is omitted.

<Specific example of update of ceiling counter and promotion counter / when operation navigation is not performed>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the operation navigation is not performed in the fixed notification state in the high navigation state.

  In this example, the condition device is No. in the first game in the final notification state, compared to the example of the effect described with reference to FIG. The only difference is that it is 3. In the fixed notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, when the fixed notification flag is ON, the condition device is an internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 4 in this example) related to the AT1 type. It is determined whether or not. However, in the game R295, since the final notification flag is off, the determination itself is not performed. Therefore, the operation navigation performed when the condition device is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type (in this example, the Seven 1 Alternatively, no navigation that prompts a reverse pressing operation targeting the symbol of Seven 2 is executed, and preparation for shifting the production state from the confirmed notification state to the AT1 state is not performed.

<Specific example of update of ceiling counter and promotion counter / when AT1 type is promoted>
FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the AT1 type is promoted in the final announcement state in the high navigation state.

  The game R270 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 270, and the promotion counter becomes a certain value (10 in this example) in the final announcement state, and a game in which three bets are played. is there. In this game R270, since the promotion counter has reached a certain value (10 in this example), the AT1 type is changed from low to high (AT1 type is promoted), and the judgment mode is changed from normal to high. is doing.

  In addition, in this game R270, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT1 type promotion lottery. After performing the (promotional lottery display), using the effect image display device 157 as a trigger when another certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted), promotion of the AT1 type Is displayed (promotional display) suggesting that has been confirmed.

  In the game R270, since the final notification flag is on, in the case where the condition device is an internal winning result related to the AT1 type, in addition to the promotion display, in addition to the operation display (in this example, the seven 1 or the seven 2) (Navigation for urging a reverse pressing operation aimed at the symbol of) is executed, and preparations are made to shift the production state from the final notification state to the AT1 state.

  The game R268 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 268 and three bets are played. In this game R268, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters “bonus confirmation!”) Is continued as a normal effect. In the game R268, since the final notification flag is on in the final notification state process B described with reference to FIG. 29, the condition device determines that the internal winning result (No. 3 or No. 3 in this example) related to the AT1 type. No. 4) is determined. In this example, the condition device is No. Therefore, an operation navigation (in this example, a navigation that prompts a reverse pressing operation aiming at the blue 7 symbol) is executed.

<Specific examples of changes in rights due to reaching the ceiling>
Next, a specific example of a change in right due to reaching the ceiling will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. FIG. 76 to FIG. 77 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect aspects of effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the ceiling is not reached in the final announcement state in the high navigation state.

  The game R329 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 329 and is in a final announcement state immediately after the transition from the normal state, and is a game in which three bets are played. In this game R329, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters “bonus confirmation!”) For notifying the transition to the AT1 state is executed as a normal effect. In the game R329, the result of the internal winning is a loss, so the production state is maintained in the final notification state.

  The subsequent game R328 is the second game in the final announcement state with 328 remaining games in the high navigation state, and is a game in which three bets are played. In this game R328, the bonus confirmation display (in this example, the display including the characters “bonus confirmation!”) Is continued as a normal effect. In this game R328, the condition device is No. Therefore, the operation navigation (in this example, the navigation that promotes the reverse push operation targeting the symbol of Seven 1 or 7) is executed, and preparation for shifting the production state from the final notification state to the AT1 state is performed. Is going.

  The subsequent game R327 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 327 and the remaining number of games in the AT1 state that has shifted from the confirmed notification state is 20, and three betting games have been performed. In this game R327, the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a BET operation has been performed). And an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed), and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state (effect state counter before subtraction) Since the count value of 20 is 20, display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (display of an image including the characters “20G” in this example) is executed.

  In this example, the AT1 type is not changed from low to high (not promoted) because the ceiling has not been reached in the final announcement state in the high navigation state.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the ceiling is reached in the final announcement state in the high navigation state.

  The game R300 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 300 and is in the final notification state. In this game R300, since the ceiling counter after subtraction has reached a certain value (0 in this example), it is determined that the ceiling has been reached, and the AT1 type is changed from low to high (promoted) ) In the game R300, as a normal effect, a bonus confirmation display (in this example, a display including the characters “bonus confirmation!”) For notifying the transition to the AT1 state is executed. Further, in this game R300, the condition device is No. Therefore, an operation navigation (in this example, a navigation that prompts a reverse pressing operation targeting the symbol of Seven 1) is executed.

  In this example, the second right (a pseudo bonus with a high profit) is obtained from the state in which the first right (a pseudo bonus with a low profit) is acquired when the ceiling is reached in the final announcement state in the high navigation state. Since it is configured to be in the acquired state, even if the game from when the privilege grant is determined until it shifts to an advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state) in the advantageous state becomes longer You can play games with a sense of expectation.

<Other production examples>
Next, another effect example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining another example of the effect.

  FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing an example of an ED effect in a case where a three-wager game is performed in the LMT state, and FIG. 78 (b) is a case where a two-wager game is performed in the LMT state. It is the figure which showed an example of no ED production.

  According to the slot machine according to the modification of the first embodiment, when the normal three-stake betting game is continuously executed in the LMT state, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the period of 20 games in the LMT state During the ED effect, an end screen is executed in the final game. On the other hand, when the two betting game is continuously executed in the LMT state, the display of the end screen is continued as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 78 (c) is a diagram showing a modification of the specific display shown in FIG. 67 (D). In the effect example shown in FIG. 67D, the specific display is displayed using all the display areas of the effect image display device 157. However, as shown in FIG. 78C, at least the first display area (this example) Then, a plurality of display areas including an upper half display area) and a second display area (in this example, the lower half display area) are provided, and the first display area switches display in a certain period. The second display area is a display area in which display switching is not performed during the certain period, and a specific display may be displayed in the first display area. With such a configuration, a specific display can be displayed in the first display area, while a certain display can be continuously displayed in the second display area, and the effect can be enhanced. There is.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the invention 1-1 of the present application”) has operating means (for example, shown in FIG. 1). Stop button 137 to 139) and shift to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). And a display unit (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. The operation information of the operation means (for example, the operation navigation using the payout number display device 127 shown in FIG. 8 or 45, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) Information that can identify the position and stop order ) Can be notified, and the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for example, as shown in FIG. 18, FIG. 52, etc.) regarding the advantageous state A high-navigation state counter), and is configured to be able to update the count value of the specific counter every time a game is performed in the advantageous state. It is configured to shift to the normal state, and the certain end condition is that the number of games after the shift to the advantageous state is the upper limit when the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) The number of game media bets is the first number (for example, three betting games) and the number of game media bets is the second number. A second game ( For example, the two-number betting game) can be executed, and the second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first number is more than the second game. The game is more advantageous to the player, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as “first display”. For example, FIG. 79. The first display d1) shown in FIG. 79, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image representing the updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as “second display”). 79, for example, when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is updated. In the first game, the second display can be displayed. When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the profit state, the count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game. It is comprised as follows, It is a game stand characterized by the above. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 1-1.

  According to the gaming machine according to the invention 1-1 of the present application, it is possible to notify that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player is being performed in a mode that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-1 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, it is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like) in the advantageous state, and the first advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information. It is a certain game state, and the certain value is a value indicating a value related to the number of games (for example, the number of remaining games) in the first advantageous game state, and is one of the plural types of displays. Is a display including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as “third display”), and in the first advantageous gaming state, the first When the second game is played, the first advantageous game state may end without displaying the third display.

  With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, it is notified in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) was performed. It becomes possible to do. Further, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given an impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is By displaying suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the betting number of game media in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image relating to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”). The fourth display is a display including an image relating to an increase in the number of remaining games in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a display including characters such as “+20”, a remaining game number “LAST5” to “LAST25”). And the fourth display may be displayed when the first game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state, and the first advantageous gaming state may be displayed in the first advantageous gaming state. When the second game is played, the fourth display may not be displayed.

  With such a configuration, when the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the fourth display may not be displayed, and thus the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. By giving to the player, it becomes possible to carefully select the betting number of game media in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Further, even if the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the first display is not displayed. The advantageous gaming state may end.

  With such a configuration, the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. Thus, it becomes possible to carefully select the betting number of game media in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state. In another game state in which the operation information can be notified, and when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the first advantageous game state, the third game There may be a case where the first advantageous gaming state ends and the second advantageous gaming state starts without being displayed.

  With such a configuration, the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. In this way, it is possible to carefully select the number of game media bets in subsequent games, while the second advantageous game state may start when returning from the second game to the first game. A privilege can be given to the player who has returned to the first game, and his willingness to play can be maintained.

  In addition, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing related to the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the combination is not related to the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gamer in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the re-gamer in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, two-ply game). You may be able to play games more carefully. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state where at least the count value can be updated, and a winning probability of the re-gamer may be higher than the normal state.

Further, the above-mentioned “when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state” means “the first display in a certain state in the advantageous state”. "When the first game is started after being displayed", the above-mentioned "After the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the second game is started." “When played” may be “when the second game is started after the first display is displayed in a certain state in the advantageous state”. In addition, when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is updated and the first game is performed in the first game. "The second display is configured to be displayable" means "when the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the advantageous state, the count value is May be updated so that the second display is displayed in the first game ”.
Further, the gaming machine according to the present example (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) has an operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and a normal state (for example, shown in FIG. 6B). Control means (for example, main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting to any one of a plurality of states including a low navigation state) and an advantageous state (eg, high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). And a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means. The advantageous state is the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as “operation navigation”. For example, the operation navigation using the payout number display device 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc. Operation navigation using) The operational navigation is a navigation for pushing order, and a first counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52). Each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as “first count value”) can be updated. It is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when established, and the certain end condition is that the first count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, , The number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and is configured to be able to transition to one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states in the advantageous state. The compound One of the advantageous game states is a first advantageous game state (for example, AT2 shown in FIG. 53), and the first advantageous game state is an advantageous game capable of executing the operation navigation. A second counter (for example, an effect state counter shown in FIG. 53) relating to the first advantageous gaming state, and each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, This is a case where the count value of the counter (hereinafter referred to as “second count value”) is configured to be updatable, and in the first advantageous game state, a game that is not won in the push order is played. However, the second count value is configured to be updatable, the first number of game media bets (for example, three betting games), and the number of game media bets are A second game that is a second number (eg, two bets) The second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more than the second game. This is a game advantageous to the player, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as “first display”). For example, the display is a first display d1) shown in FIG. 79, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image representing an updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as “second display”). 79. For example, the numerical value 30) shown in FIG. 79, the certain value is a value related to the second count value, and the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state. Thereafter, when the execution of the first game is started, the count values of both the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the second game is updated in the first game. If the display is configured to be displayable and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first count value And the first count value of the second count value Is updated so that the second display is not displayed in the second game, and a certain profit granting condition (for example, a condition for executing the high navigation state related process) is satisfied. In the execution of the first game in the advantageous state, the certain profit granting condition can be established, and the execution of the second game in the advantageous state. Then, it is comprised so that the said certain profit provision conditions may not be satisfied, It is a game stand characterized by the above-mentioned.
According to the gaming machine according to the present example, when the execution of the second game, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the first game, is started, the first count value and the second count value Since only the first count value is updated and the second display (display including an image representing the updated value related to the second count value) is not displayed in the second game, the second game is It is possible to notify the player of what he / she has done in a manner that is not embarrassing for the player. In addition, since the first counter (counter regarding the advantageous state) is updated in both the first game and the second game, the second game is performed with the player who is playing correctly in the first game. It is possible to ensure the fairness of the players who are playing. In addition, by preferentially treating the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter may be referred to as “the invention 1-2 of the present application”) has operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), and a control means for shifting to any one of a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) ( For example, a gaming machine having a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3, and operating information of the operating means (for example, an operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, FIG. 52), the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157, etc., is configured so that the stop position and stop order of each reel can be identified), and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. More advantageous than the normal state with respect to A specific counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and the count value of the specific counter is updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. And configured so as to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is such that the count value is a first specific value. This is a condition that is satisfied when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and the betting number of game media is the first number. A first game (for example, a three-game betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of game media bets is a second number are configured to be executable. The number of is different from the first number Yes, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. In the advantageous state, a specific effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) When the game is configured to be able to start execution and a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of game execution, if the game is the first game, the count value is updated and the first game is updated. In the game, the execution of the specific effect is configured to be able to start, and when the game is the second game when the certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the game execution, the count value Is updated so that the execution of the specific effect is not started in the second game. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-2.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-2, it is possible to notify that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed in a mode that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may be shifted to the second advantageous gaming state, and the execution of the specific effect may be started on the condition of the transition.

  Further, the certain requirement is that the first count value is a second specific value, and the first specific value and the second specific value may be different values. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is capable of notifying the operation information. The second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that can be shifted after the number of games has reached a certain number of times since the transition to the advantageous state, and the second advantageous gaming state is the It is a gaming state in which the user can stay until the end of the advantageous state, and the specific effect may be an effect that can be executed in the second advantageous game state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous gaming state, and to carefully select the number of betting media games in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, when the second game is not performed and the second advantageous game state is entered after the transition to the advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as “first case”), the second advantage is achieved. The maximum number of executions of the first game in the gaming state is the first number, and the transition to the second advantageous gaming state after the second game is performed after the transition to the advantageous state (Hereinafter referred to as “second case”) may be that the maximum number of executions of the first game in the second advantageous gaming state may be the second number of times. The second number is a smaller number and includes display means (for example, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of display. , A display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter referred to as “first display”), In one case, the first display is configured to be displayed upon transition to the second advantageous gaming state, and in the second case, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is performed. In this case, the first display may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous gaming state, and to carefully select the number of betting media games in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In the advantageous state, the first advantageous gaming state can be shifted to the first advantageous gaming state. The first advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information different from the second advantageous gaming state. One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as “second game”). When the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state is terminated without displaying the second display. There may be.

  Further, when the second game is played in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without the specific performance being performed.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without performing a specific performance, and by giving the player the impression of losing the number of games in an advantageous gaming state, It is possible to carefully select the betting number of game media. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Further, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be notified.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without notifying the advantageous information for the player, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, It becomes possible to carefully select the betting number of game media in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, it is configured to be able to start execution of a certain freeze effect (for example, freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81) in the advantageous state, and the specific effect is an effect related to the certain freeze effect. Also good.

  Moreover, a display means (for example, the effect image display apparatus 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means includes a first display (for example, a first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, 79 is a means capable of displaying the first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, and the first display includes an image indicating the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image indicating a certain remaining number of games (for example, the numerical value 29 shown in FIG. 79), and the second game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is performed, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

  With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, it is notified in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) was performed. It becomes possible to do. Further, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given an impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is By displaying suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the betting number of game media in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing related to the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the combination is not related to the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gamer in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the re-gamer in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, two-ply game). You may be able to play games more carefully. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state where at least the count value can be updated, and a winning probability of the re-gamer may be higher than the normal state.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the invention 1-3 of the present application”) has operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), and a control means for shifting to any one of a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) ( For example, a gaming machine having a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3, and operating information of the operating means (for example, an operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, FIG. 52), the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157, etc., is configured so that the stop position and stop order of each reel can be identified), and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. More advantageous than the normal state with respect to A specific counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and the count value of the specific counter is updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. And configured so as to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is such that the count value is a first specific value. This is a condition that is satisfied when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and the betting number of game media is the first number. A first game (for example, a three-game betting game) and a second game (for example, a two-card betting game) in which the number of game media bets is a second number are configured to be executable. The number of is different from the first number Yes, in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. In the advantageous state, there is a freeze effect (for example, freeze effect fz1 shown in FIG. 81). In the case where a certain requirement is satisfied at the start of the execution of the game and the game is the first game, the count value is updated and the first value is updated. In the game, the execution of the certain freeze effect is configured to be able to start, and when the certain requirement is satisfied at the time of starting the execution of the game, when the game is the second game, The gaming machine is configured such that execution of the certain freeze effect is not started in the second game when the count value is updated. FIG. 81 is a view showing an outline of the invention 1-3 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine according to the first to third aspects of the present invention, it is possible to notify the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player is being performed in a mode that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the first to third aspects of the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the certain requirement is satisfied, the game may be shifted to the second advantageous gaming state, and the execution of the specific effect may be started on the condition of the transition.

  Further, the certain requirement is that the first count value is a second specific value, and the first specific value and the second specific value may be different values. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “second advantageous gaming state”, for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 or the like). The state is a gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, and the second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that can be shifted after the number of games has reached a certain number of times since the transition to the advantageous state. The second advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the player can stay until the end of the advantageous state, and the certain freeze effect is started in connection with the transition to the second advantageous gaming state. It may be a production.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous gaming state, and to carefully select the number of betting media games in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, when the second game is not performed and the second advantageous game state is entered after the transition to the advantageous state (hereinafter referred to as “first case”), the second advantage is achieved. The maximum number of executions of the first game in the gaming state is the first number, and the transition to the second advantageous gaming state after the second game is performed after the transition to the advantageous state (Hereinafter referred to as “second case”) may be that the maximum number of executions of the first game in the second advantageous gaming state may be the second number of times. The second number is a smaller number and includes display means (for example, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of display. , A display corresponding to the first number of times (hereinafter referred to as “first display”), In one case, the first display is configured to be displayed upon transition to the second advantageous gaming state, and in the second case, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is performed. In this case, the first display may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous gaming state, and to carefully select the number of betting media games in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In the advantageous state, the first advantageous gaming state can be shifted to the first advantageous gaming state. The first advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information different from the second advantageous gaming state. One of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image indicating that the number of remaining games in the first advantageous game state is 0 (hereinafter referred to as “second game”). When the second game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state is terminated without displaying the second display. There may be.

  In addition, when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state may end without performing the certain freeze effect.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without performing a certain freeze effect, so that it gives the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous gaming state, thereby allowing subsequent games This makes it possible to carefully select the betting number of game media. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Moreover, it is comprised so that execution of a specific effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 80) can be started in the said advantageous state, The said certain freeze effect is an effect relevant to the said specific effect. Good.

  Further, the specific effect may be an effect in which information advantageous to the player may be notified.

  With such a configuration, the advantageous state may end without notifying the advantageous information for the player, and by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, It becomes possible to carefully select the betting number of game media in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Moreover, a display means (for example, the effect image display apparatus 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means includes a first display (for example, a first display d1 shown in FIG. 79) and a second display (for example, 79 is a means capable of displaying the first display d2) shown in FIG. 79, and the first display includes an image indicating the number of remaining games in the advantageous state (for example, the numerical value 30 shown in FIG. 79). The second display is a display including an image indicating a certain remaining number of games (for example, the numerical value 29 shown in FIG. 79), and the second game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When the first game is performed, the second display may be displayed without displaying the first display.

  With such a configuration, when returning from the second game to the first game, it is notified in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that a game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) was performed. It becomes possible to do. Further, since the first advantageous gaming state may end without displaying the third display, the player is given an impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state, and the third display is By displaying suddenly, it becomes possible to carefully select the betting number of game media in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  In addition, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing related to the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the combination is not related to the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gamer in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the re-gamer in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, two-ply game). You may be able to play games more carefully. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state where at least the count value can be updated, and a winning probability of the re-gamer may be higher than the normal state.

  In addition, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 1-4”) has operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), and a control means for shifting to any one of a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) ( For example, a gaming machine having a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3, and operating information of the operating means (for example, an operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, FIG. 52), the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157, etc., is configured so that the stop position and stop order of each reel can be identified), and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. More advantageous than the normal state with respect to A specific counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and the count value of the specific counter is updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. And configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is such that the count value is a specific value (for example, , 0) (for example, when the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state has reached the upper limit number), the first number in which the betting number of game media is the first number It is configured to be able to execute a game (for example, a three-stake bet game) and a second game (for example, a two-stake bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number, and the second number is , A number different from the first number In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game. In the advantageous state, the first advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like). And is configured to be able to execute a certain effect related to the end of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, the end effect fn1 shown in FIG. 82), and in the advantageous state, the first advantageous game state can be executed. When only a game is performed, the certain advantageous effect may be executed by shifting to the first advantageous game state, and only the second game is performed in the advantageous state. When it is performed, the gaming machine is configured to execute the certain effect without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 1-4 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine according to the first to fourth aspects of the present invention, it is possible to notify the player that the game that is disadvantageous to the player (second game) has been performed in a mode that is not embarrassing to the player. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player by notifying that the advantageous state has ended for the game in which the second game is played. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to carefully select the number of game media bets in subsequent games.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the first to fourth aspects of the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means displays a difference number which is a difference between a game medium input by the player and a game medium acquired by the player. The difference number display can be displayed, and when the difference number is less than 0, a display indicating 0 is displayed as the difference number display. When only the second game is performed, the expected value of the difference number is configured to be less than 0, and the certain value executed when only the second game is performed in the advantageous state. Even if it is an effect, the difference number display may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in an advantageous gaming state, it is possible to carefully select the number of game media bets in subsequent games.

  In addition, even if the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the certain effect is executed without shifting to the first advantageous game state. There may be cases.

  With such a configuration, a certain effect may be executed without shifting to the first advantageous gaming state, thereby giving the player the impression that the number of games has been lost in the advantageous gaming state. Thus, it is possible to carefully select the betting number of game media in subsequent games. Further, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the second advantageous gaming state is the first advantageous gaming state. When the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the first game is not shifted to the first advantageous game state. It may be configured so that the certain effect may be executed by shifting to the second advantageous gaming state.

  With such a configuration, the transition to the second advantageous gaming state may be performed without transitioning to the first advantageous gaming state, and the end effect may be executed, thereby losing the number of games in the advantageous gaming state. By giving the player a positive impression, it is possible to carefully select the number of game media bets in subsequent games, while the second advantageous game state is changed when returning from the second game to the first game. Since it may start, it becomes possible to give a privilege to the player who returned to the 1st game, and a game willingness can be maintained.

  In addition, the “certain effect relating to the end of the first advantageous gaming state” may be “a certain effect relating to the end of the advantageous state”.

  In addition, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing related to the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the combination is not related to the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gamer in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the re-gamer in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, two-ply game). You may be able to play games more carefully. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state where at least the count value can be updated, and a winning probability of the re-gamer may be higher than the normal state.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “present invention 1-5”) has an operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), and a control means for shifting to any one of a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) ( For example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3 and a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing relating to the internal winning of the role and determining the lottery result Operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) Stop each reel Information that can identify the position and stop order), and the advantageous state is a state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter (for example, the advantageous state) , High navigation state counters shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52, etc., each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter can be updated, and a certain end condition is satisfied. When the count value becomes a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, to the advantageous state), it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state. This is a condition that is satisfied when the number of games after the transition reaches the upper limit number). When the winning combination is a special game (for example, the special game shown in FIG. 6A or FIG. 43A). Status In the advantageous state so as to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 etc.), and a certain effect related to the termination of the certain advantageous gaming state (For example, the end effect fn1 shown in FIG. 83) can be executed, and in the advantageous state, the transition to the certain advantageous game state can be started and the execution of the end effect can be started. When a game is played in a state where the special role is internally won, the execution of the certain effect can be started without shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. It is a game stand characterized by being. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-5.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-5, even if the advantageous state ends without being able to arrange the symbols related to the special role, by making the player feel like having shifted to an advantageous gaming state, It is possible to reduce disappointing feelings and feelings of impatience. In addition, since the counter related to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-5 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the display means displays a difference number which is a difference between a game medium input by the player and a game medium acquired by the player. The difference number display can be displayed. When the difference number is less than 0, a display indicating 0 is displayed as the difference number display. Even if the certain effect is executed without shifting to the advantageous gaming state, the difference number display may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, by making it possible to emphasize the small number of winnings, it is possible to carefully select the betting number of game media in subsequent games by giving the player a lost impression. In addition, since a player who is playing a game has a relatively large display of the acquired number, it is possible to satisfy such superiority of the player.

In addition, in the certain effect that is executed without shifting to the certain advantageous gaming state in the advantageous state, the special combination is not notified even if the special combination is internally won. It may be configured.
With such a configuration, it may be possible to satisfy the superiority of seniors.

  In addition, the “a certain effect relating to the end of the certain advantageous gaming state” may be “a certain effect relating to the end of the advantageous state”.

  In addition, the first game in which the betting number of game media is the first number and the second game in which the betting number of game media is the second number can be executed, and the second number Is a number different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the combination of the game medium is Including a re-gamer that can play a game without being thrown in, and in a certain control state, the winning of the re-gamer in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the re-gamer in the first game The probability may be higher in the winning probability.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, two-ply game). You may be able to play games more carefully. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state where at least the count value can be updated, and a winning probability of the re-gamer may be higher than the normal state.

  Further, when the second game is played in the advantageous state where the special combination is internally won, the certain effect of the certain effect can be achieved without shifting to the certain advantageous game state in the advantageous state. It may be configured to start execution.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter may be referred to as “present invention 1-6”) has a first number of gaming media bets. One game (for example, three betting games) and a second game (for example, two betting games) in which the number of game media bets is a second number are configured to be executable. The number is different from the first number. In a certain state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game, and the game is more than one game. A certain effect (for example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 84) is configured to be executable, and the certain effect is an effect including effects of a plurality of scenes, and one of the effects of the plurality of scenes. The scene effect is an effect of the first scene (for example, the first scene shown in FIG. 84). The effect of one of the effects of the plurality of scenes is the effect of the second scene (for example, the second scene shown in FIG. 84), and the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed If the execution of the first game is started after the first game, the execution of the production of the second scene can be started in the first game, and the production of the first scene is performed. When the execution of the second game is started after the broken game, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game. It is a game machine. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-6.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-6, it is possible to notify the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player is being performed in a mode that is not embarrassing to the player.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-6 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the first game You may be comprised so that execution of the production of said 2nd scene can be started.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player who has returned from the second game to the first game while viewing the flow of the correct performance.

  Further, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the second game is performed in the first game. It may be configured so that execution of another certain effect can be started without starting execution of the effect of the scene.

  With such a configuration, another certain effect is suddenly executed, so that the player strongly impresses the effect on the player and returns the first game to the player who has returned to the first game. You can reconfirm what you were doing.

  In addition, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game. In addition, execution of at least some of the effects of the first scene may be started.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to notify in a manner that is not embarrassing to the player that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed. In addition, by repeatedly performing the production, it is possible to make the player notice that the player is feeling uncomfortable and performing the second game. In some cases, it is possible to incite awareness of the betting number of game media by attracting the player's attention, assuming that the same effect is a rare effect.

  Further, the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display device 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) The information indicating the stop position and stop order) can be notified, and the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state regarding the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter ( For example, the high-navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 is provided so that the count value of the specific counter can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. It is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when established, and the certain end condition is that the count value becomes a first specific value (for example, 0) (example) (If the number of games since the transition to the advantageous state has reached the upper limit number), the above-mentioned condition of “the first game after the game in which the production of the first scene was performed” When the execution is started, the execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game, and “the game in which the first scene effect is performed” When the execution of the first game is started after the second game, the first count value is updated and the execution of the second scene effect in the first game can be started. In the case where the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the production of the second scene in the second game. "Is configured not to start execution of". When the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the game is performed, the first count value is updated and the execution of the effect in the second scene is started in the second game. “It is configured not to be performed”.

  With such a configuration, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. It becomes possible.

  In addition, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing related to the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the combination is not related to the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gamer in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the re-gamer in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, two-ply game). You may be able to play games more carefully. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state where at least the count value can be updated, and a winning probability of the re-gamer may be higher than the normal state.

  In addition, a first game (for example, three betting games) in which the number of game media bets is the first number and a second game (for example, two bets in which the number of game media bets is the second number). The second number is different from the first number, and in a certain state, the first game is more than the second game. The game is advantageous to the player, and is configured to be able to execute a certain effect (for example, the linked effect shown in FIG. 63 or the linked effect shown in FIG. 64D) over a plurality of games. The effect is an effect including effects of a plurality of scenes, and the effect of one of the effects of the plurality of scenes is the first scene (for example, the “enemy attack” scene shown in FIG. 63, (Denison attack scene shown in FIG. 64D), and the first scene was produced. When execution of the first game is started after a technique, the first scene is rendered to be continuously executable in the first game, and the first scene is rendered. When the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the game is performed, the first scene is not continuously performed in the second game. It may be a characteristic game stand.

  According to such a game machine, it is possible to notify the player that he / she was playing a game unfavorable to the player (second game) in a manner not embarrassing to the player.

  Further, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the first game in the first game You may be comprised so that execution of the production | presentation of one scene can be started.

  Further, when the second game is performed after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and then the execution of the first game is started, the first game in the first game It may be configured such that execution of a certain effect can be started without starting the execution of the effect of one scene.

  In addition, when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed, the execution of the effect of the second scene is not started in the second game. In addition, execution of at least some of the effects of the first scene may be started.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter may be referred to as “present invention 1-7”) has operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), and a control means for shifting to any one of a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) ( For example, a game machine having a main control unit 300) shown in FIG. 3, a first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (for example, a three-game bet game), and a game medium A second game (for example, a two-wager game) in which the number of bets is a second number, and the second number is different from the first number; In the advantageous state, the first game is more to the player than the second game. The operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIG. 8 or 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) (Information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel), and the advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and the advantageous state. A specific counter (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18, FIG. 52, etc.) each time a game is played in the advantageous state, Is configured to be updatable, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied. A certain value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number), and a certain counter relating to the advantageous state (For example, the ceiling counter shown in FIG. 85, FIG. 19, FIG. 68, etc.), each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the certain counter (hereinafter referred to as “certain count value”). Can be updated, and when the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0), a certain advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, the specific advantageous state shown in FIG. When the first game is played in the advantageous state, both of the specific count value and the certain count value are set. Count value is updated When the second game is played in the advantageous state, only the specific count value of the specific count value and the certain count value can be updated. It is a game stand characterized by that. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-7.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-7, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game Can be secured. In addition, by preferentially treating the player who played the first game correctly, it can be expected that the player who did not play the game correctly will be corrected.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-7 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first game is performed after the second game is performed in the advantageous state, the specific advantageous state may be shifted in the advantageous state. Also good.

  With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play can be maintained by making it possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned from the second game to the first game.

  Further, when the number of games of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds a certain number, even if the first game is performed in the advantageous state, there is no case of shifting to the specific advantageous state. It may be configured as follows.

  With such a configuration, the player who made the second game maliciously (for example, searching for a strategy) while allowing the second game to the player who made a mistake in counting the number of games, etc. (Players who play irregular games such as, etc.) by giving benefits to the player who is correctly playing the first game and correcting the player who played the second game Can be expected.

  In the advantageous state, the first advantageous gaming state is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous gaming state. The first advantageous gaming state is a certain advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, and the specific advantageous state. May be a state relating to the transition to the first advantageous gaming state.

  Further, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a second advantageous gaming state (for example, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the second advantageous gaming state can notify the operation information. And when the specific count value reaches a third value (e.g., 20), it is configured to be able to shift to the second advantageous gaming state. The third value is another value, and even if the number of games of the second game in the advantageous state exceeds the certain number, the first game was performed in the advantageous state. In some cases, it may be configured such that the second advantageous gaming state may be entered before the advantageous state ends.

  With such a configuration, the player's willingness to play can be maintained by making it possible to give a privilege to the player who has returned from the second game to the first game.

  In addition, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing related to the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the combination is not related to the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gamer in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the re-gamer in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, two-ply game). You may be able to play games more carefully. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state where at least the count value can be updated, and a winning probability of the re-gamer may be higher than the normal state.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “present invention 1-8”) has an operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), and a control means for shifting to any one of a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) ( For example, a game machine including a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3 and display means (for example, an effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein the operation means Operation information (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display device 127 shown in FIG. 8 or FIG. 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) Can be notified) The advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18, FIG. 52, etc.) And each time a game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the specific counter can be updated, and when a certain end condition is satisfied, the state shifts from the advantageous state to the normal state. The certain end condition is that when the count value reaches a specific value (for example, 0) (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number) ), A first game in which the betting number of game media is the first number (for example, three-game betting game), and a second game in which the betting number of game media is the second number (For example, two bets The second number is different from the first number, and in the advantageous state, the first game is more than the second game. It is a game advantageous for a player, and is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states in the advantageous state, and one advantageous game of the plurality of advantageous game states The state is a first advantageous gaming state (for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 86, the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and one advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states is , A second advantageous gaming state (for example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 86, the judge state shown in FIG. 6 and the like), and the first advantageous gaming state is more than the second advantageous gaming state. Is more advantageous for the player, the first advantage After the gaming state has ended, the second advantageous gaming state can be shifted to, and one of the plurality of types of display is displayed at the end of the first advantageous gaming state. Display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”). For example, the display is a first display d1) shown in FIG. 86, and one of the plurality of types of display is a certain display corresponding to the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter, “second display”). 86. For example, the second display d2) shown in FIG.86, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a specific display different from any of the first display and the second display. (Hereinafter referred to as “third display”, for example, the third display d1 shown in FIG. 86), and when the first game is started after the first display is displayed. When the count value is updated and the second display can be displayed in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed. In the game, the third display is updated after the count value is updated. Viewable a configuration,

This is a game table characterized by that. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-8.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-8, it is possible to notify that the game (second game) that is disadvantageous to the player has been performed in a mode that is not embarrassing to the player. Since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. Further, it is possible to entertain the game in the next game state comfortably while the first game is being performed correctly.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-8 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, the second display may be a display related to the start of the second advantageous gaming state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the game in the next game state comfortably while correctly playing the first game.

  In addition, the second display is a display composed of a plurality of scenes, and the display of one of the plurality of scenes is a display of the first scene. The display of one of the scene displays is a display of the second scene, and the display of the first scene is a display that is started by a certain operation relating to the progress of the game. The display of the second scene may be a display that is started by another certain operation related to the progress of the game, which is performed following the certain operation.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the game in the next game state comfortably while correctly playing the first game.

  Further, a lottery process (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process on the internal winning of the combination and determining a lottery result is provided, and the display of the second scene is as described above. It may be a display whose display mode changes in relation to the lottery result in the game where the display of the second display is started.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the game in the next game state comfortably while correctly playing the first game.

  In addition, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing related to the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the combination is not related to the insertion of game media. In a certain control state, the winning probability of the re-gamer in the second game is greater than the winning probability of the re-gamer in the first game. The winning probability may be high.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, two-ply game). You may be able to play games more carefully. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state where at least the count value can be updated, and a winning probability of the re-gamer may be higher than the normal state.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter may be referred to as “present invention 1-9”) has operating means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 1). 139), lottery means (for example, winning prize internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10 (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process regarding the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result, and a normal state (for example, FIG. 6B) Control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) for shifting to any one of the low-navigation state and the advantageous state (for example, the high-navigation state shown in FIG. A gaming table comprising a privilege granting means (for example, AT number state addition A lottery in AT2 state processing A shown in FIG. 23) capable of granting a privilege related to the advantageous state in the advantageous state, and a certain counter (for example, FIG. 87 19 and 68), each time a game is played, the count value of the certain counter (hereinafter referred to as “certain count value”) can be updated. In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to a certain advantageous gaming state (for example, the BB state shown in FIG. 43 (b) or the AT1 state), and the right to transition to the certain advantageous gaming state (for example, inside the BB) After winning or the right to shift to the AT1 state is acquired, a winning notification indicating the acquisition of the right (for example, a bonus determination notification bk1 shown in FIG. 87, a bonus confirmation display (FIG. 68, FIG. 70, etc.)) The display of an image including the characters “bonus confirmed!”) Is started, and the right to enter the certain advantageous gaming state includes a first symbol (for example, FIG. 4 ( a) and shown in FIG. (Hereinafter referred to as “first right”, for example, pseudo bonus 1 shown in FIG. 87) and the second symbol (eg, FIG. 4 (a) or Seven 2 symbol shown in FIG. 87). ) (Hereinafter referred to as “second right”, for example, pseudo bonus 2 shown in FIG. 87), and the second right is more advantageous to the player than the first right. In the state where the first right has been acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started, the first notification is performed when the first result is determined as the result of the internal winning. The second result is determined as the result of the internal winning in the state where the second right is acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started. Is configured to start execution of the second notification when The first result is that the first symbol is displayed when the operation means is operated in accordance with the content of the first notification (for example, the effective line shown in FIG. 87 or FIG. 4B). (Or displayed on a winning line other than the active line), and the second result is displayed when the operation means is operated according to the content of the second notification. (For example, displayed on the active line (or winning line other than the active line) shown in FIG. 87 or FIG. 4B), and after the execution of the winning notification is started, When the certain count value becomes a certain value (for example, 0) in a certain state from the state where the first right is acquired to the certain advantageous gaming state, the first The second right from the state in which the right is acquired Is configured to be in a state of being acquired, it is the amusement machine according to claim. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 1-9.

  According to the game stand according to the present invention 1-9, even if the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention 1-9 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the second right is acquired from the state where the first right is acquired, the first notification may not be executed.

  In addition, a first game (for example, three betting games) in which the number of game media bets is the first number and a second game (for example, two bets in which the number of game media bets is the second number). The second number is different from the first number, and is more advantageous than the second game in the advantageous state (or / and the normal state). The first game is more advantageous to the player, and the first game is performed in the state where the first right is acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started. The second game is configured so that the certain count value can be updated and the first right is acquired after the execution of the winning notification is started. If done, the certain count value is configured not to be updated. It can have.

  With such a configuration, since the counter relating to the advantageous state is updated, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. It becomes possible. In addition, it can be expected that a player who did not play a game correctly will be corrected by giving a preferential treatment to the player when the game is played correctly in the first game. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the operation information of the operation means (for example, operation navigation using the payout number display device 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc.) The information indicating the stop position and stop order) can be notified, and the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state regarding the notification of the operation information, and a specific counter ( For example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 52 is provided, and the count value of the specific counter (hereinafter referred to as “specific count value”) is updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. And configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end value is determined by the specific count value. This is a condition that is satisfied when a certain value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit), and the certain counter is the specific counter The counter is a counter related to the advantageous state, and the certain count value is a value that can be updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state, and the first game is performed in the advantageous state. In the case where the second game is performed, both the specific count value and the count value of the certain count value are configured to be updatable, and when the second game is performed in the advantageous state, Only the specific count value of the specific count value and the certain count value may be configured to be updatable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player who is playing correctly in the first game and the player who is playing the second game. In addition, it can be expected that a player who did not play a game correctly will be corrected by giving a preferential treatment to the player when the game is played correctly in the first game. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  In addition, the combination includes a re-playing role capable of playing a game regardless of the insertion of a game medium, and in a certain control state, the winning combination is higher than the winning probability of the re-playing role in the first game. The winning probability of the re-gamer in the second game may be configured to be higher.

  With such a configuration, it is difficult to return to the first game (for example, three-ply game) after performing the second game (for example, two-ply game). You may be able to play games more carefully. In addition, even when the game from when the privilege grant is determined until the game state is shifted to a certain game state becomes longer, the game can be performed with a sense of expectation.

  Further, the certain control state may be a state where at least the specific count value can be updated, and a winning probability of the re-gamer may be higher than the normal state.

[Embodiment 2]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In order to avoid redundant description, only the configuration different from the gaming machine according to the first embodiment will be described in principle. In addition, FIGS. 88 to 96 are used only in the description of the second embodiment in principle, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the second embodiment is similar to FIGS. The reference numeral 96 is given priority.

<AT2 state processing A>
First, AT2 state processing A according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to the AT2 state process A according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the AT2 state process A according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S1451 to S1453 are added to the AT2 state process A according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S1451, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S1452, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S1453. In step S1452, after performing the AT number addition lottery 1 using the lottery value corresponding to “LMT standby flag OFF” in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88B, the process proceeds to step S1402. On the other hand, in step S1453, after the AT number addition lottery 2 is performed using the lottery value corresponding to “LMT standby flag ON” in the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 (b), the process proceeds to step S1402.

  Thus, in this example, the number of AT additional games in the AT2 state is varied according to the state of the LMT standby flag. Specifically, when the LMT standby flag is off, the number of AT extra games is selected in the range of 0G to 100G according to the winning combination, but when the LMT standby flag is on, the internal winning is made. Depending on the combination, the number of games on the AT is selected in the range of 0G to 10G. That is, in the AT2 state, when the LMT standby flag is on (when shifting from the AT2 state to the LMT state), the AT is more effective than when the LMT standby flag is off (when not shifting from the AT2 state to the LMT state). The number of added games is reduced.

<Judge state processing B>
Next, a judgment state process B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the judgment state processing B according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to the judgment state processing B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the judge state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2251 to S2253 are added to the judge state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2251, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied. If it is not satisfied (when correction is not necessary), the process proceeds to step S2203, and if it is satisfied (correction is corrected). If necessary, the process proceeds to step S2252.

  Here, the determination (correction condition determination) whether or not the correction condition is satisfied in step S2251 is performed according to the following procedure. In the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202, any one of the AT2 initial numbers defined in the AT2 initial number lottery table shown in FIG. 89B is selected. Subsequently, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the determination is acquired, and AT2 selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202 from the value X of the high navigation state counter. Subtract the initial number (Y). When the value after subtraction (XY) is equal to or less than the first determination value (100 in this example), it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied.

  Further, in the correction condition determination in step S2251, the difference number (A) at the time of the determination is acquired, and from the difference number (A), it corresponds to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202. The expected number (B) to be subtracted. And it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied also when the value after subtraction (A−B) is equal to or less than the second determination value (1500 in this example).

  In step 2252, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S 2253, the LMT standby flag is set on, and then the process proceeds to step S 2204. Here, the AT correction value in step S2252 is calculated by adding a certain value (20 in this example) to the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery in step S2202. Therefore, for example, when the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the correction condition determination is 100 and the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery is 30, the correction condition is satisfied. In step S2252, 50 (= AT2 initial number (Y) 30 + 20 selected in the AT2 initial number lottery) is set as the AT2 correction value.

  In the judgment state process B according to the second embodiment, a lottery value (number of pullback G) is set in the effect state counter in the pullback state in step S2206. However, as shown in FIG. It is configured so that the degree of expectation for pullback is higher when the lottery value (number of pullback G) is 1G than when the number is 2-9G.

<AT2 state processing B>
Next, AT2 state processing B according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a flow of AT2 state processing B according to Embodiment 2, and corresponds to AT2 state processing B according to Embodiment 1 shown in FIG.

  In the AT2 state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2351 to S2353 are added to the AT2 state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2351, it is determined whether the LMT standby flag is off or on. If it is off, the process proceeds to step S2302, and if it is on, the process proceeds to step S2352. In step S2352, the value of the LMT initial value + 1 is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S2353, the LMT state is set in the effect state, and then the process proceeds to step 2306.

  Thus, in this example, in the judge state (judgement state process B shown in FIG. 89), when the AT2 state is set as the effect state and the LMT standby flag is set to ON, the state is changed from the AT2 state. It is configured to shift to the LMT state.

<Retraction state processing B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91A, the pull back state process B according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 91A is a flowchart showing the flow of the pullback state process B according to the second embodiment, and corresponds to the pullback state process B according to the first embodiment shown in FIG.

  In the pullback state process B according to the second embodiment, the processes of steps S2451 to S2453 are added to the pullback state process B according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. Specifically, in step S2451, it is determined whether or not the correction condition is satisfied. If it is not satisfied (when correction is not necessary), the process proceeds to step S2403, and if it is satisfied (correction is corrected). If necessary, the process proceeds to step S2452. The correction condition determination (determination of whether or not the correction condition is satisfied) executed in step S2451 is the same as step S2251 of the judgment state process B described with reference to FIG. 89A. Is omitted.

  In step 2452, the AT2 correction value is set in the effect state counter. In the next step S2453, the LMT standby flag is set to ON, and the process proceeds to step S2404.

  FIG. 91B is a diagram showing an example of transition of the AT state in the high navigation state. 91 (b) (1) shows a typical example of transition of the AT state, and is an example of transition in the order of AT1 state (20G) → AT2 state (30G to 100G).

  On the other hand, FIGS. 91 (b) and (2) show another example of transition of the AT state. The AT1 state (20G) → the judge state → the AT2 state (30G to 100G) → the pullback state → the AT2 state (10G). This is an example of shifting in order. In this example, the AT2 state shifted from the withdrawal state is more disadvantageous for the player than the AT1 state. Note that the number of games in the AT2 state shifted from the withdrawal state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

  FIGS. 91 (b) and (3) show another example of transition of the AT state: AT1 state (20G) → judgement state → AT2 state (30G to 100G) → retraction state → AT3 state (10G) This is an example of shifting in order. In this example, the AT state shifted from the withdrawal state is an AT3 state different from the AT1 state and the AT2 state, and is in a disadvantageous state for the player than the AT1 state. Note that the number of games in the AT3 state shifted from the withdrawal state is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, 10G to 50G.

<Specific examples of various effects and various displays>
Next, specific examples of various effects and various displays executed by the slot machine according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 to FIG. 96 are timing charts showing the flow of effects, and show the effect modes of effects to be executed in association with the timing charts.

<AT2 state → Judge state → Pull back state → Low navigation state>
FIG. 92 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of production when the production state transitions in the order of AT2 state → judgement state → retraction state in the high navigation state and then transitions to the normal state of the low navigation state.

  The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 328 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 2 in the AT2 state. In this game R328, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). In addition to executing an AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state, an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, "2-1-3" is displayed) is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (effect state counter) Since the count value is 2), the display including the image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, the display of the image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is executed. .

  The subsequent game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 1. In this game R327, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as the game R328, while the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, (Displaying an image including the characters “LAST 1G”).

  The subsequent game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is zero. In this game R326, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as in the games R328 to R327, while the display including the image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) In the example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G” is executed.

  In addition, this game R326 is a final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image indicating the count value of the effect state counter (display of the image including the characters “LAST 0G” in this example) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

  The subsequent game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 325 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 9 in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state. In this game R325, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after a BET or the like)), the effect state is judged from the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157. Since the transition to the state has started, the judgment production corresponding to the start of the judgment state is started and the remaining number of games in the judgment state (the count value of the production state counter) is 10. Display (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 10G”) is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect state is judged using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is established in the game R325 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). From this, the judgment effect corresponding to the judge state is executed and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 9, so that the image showing the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, an image including the characters “LAST 9G” is displayed).

  The game R315 to the game R314 are games in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 315 to 314, and the remaining number of games in the pullback state shifted from the judge state is 1 to 0. In the games R315 to R314, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the judge state using the effect image display device 157. Since transitioning to the retracted state, a normal screen (retracted) corresponding to the retracted state is displayed. In addition, after the game R314 is ended, the pull-back state in the high navigation state is ended, the normal state is transferred to the low navigation state, and the effect image display device 157 is used to display a normal screen corresponding to the normal state in the low navigation state ( Normal) is displayed.

  Note that the display mode of the normal screen (normal) may be at least partially the same as the display mode of the normal screen (withdrawal), or all may be different from the display mode of the normal screen (withdrawal). Moreover, when displaying the screen of the same display mode, it is preferable that the probability that the screen is displayed in the retracted state is higher than the probability that the screen is displayed in the low navigation state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → low navigation state>
FIG. 92 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the effect state shifts in the order of AT2 state → LMT state in the high navigation state and then shifts to the normal state of the low navigation state.

  The game R69 is a game with 69 remaining games in the high navigation state and 0 games remaining in the AT2 state. In this game R69, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as the previous games R71 to R70, while a display including an image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is displayed. (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G”) is executed.

  In addition, this game R69 is a final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image indicating the count value of the effect state counter (display of the image including the characters “LAST 0G” in this example) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted.

  The game R68 is a game with 68 remaining games in the high navigation state and 19 games remaining in the LMT state shifted from the AT2 state. In this game R68, the effect state is changed from the AT2 state to the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the transition has been made, an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the start of the LMT state is started, and an operation navigation suggesting a stop operation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) is executed. Since the total number of games in the state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20, the total number of games in the LMT state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the effect state counter) Display (in this example, display of an image including characters “20/20 more”) is executed. It should be noted that the painting of the operation navigation indicates that the stop operation has not yet been performed at the same timing.

  Thereafter, when the certain condition is satisfied in the game R68 (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted), the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157. Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (count value of the effect state counter) is 19. Display including images indicating the total number of games in LMT and the number of remaining games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “19/20”) Yes. In addition, since the flow of effects of the game R67 to the game R50 is substantially the same, the description thereof is omitted.

  The game R49 is a game with 49 remaining games in the high navigation state and 0 remaining games in the LMT state. In this game R49, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state is executed, the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 0. Display including an image indicating the total number of games in the state and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “0/20”) ing.

  After that, because this game R49 is a final game in the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted) While displaying the ED effect end screen corresponding to the end of the LMT state and executing the result display 2 in the LMT state (for example, displaying the number of acquired game media and the number of games in the AT2 state), the LMT state The display including the image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (display of the image including the characters “0/20” in the present example) and the operation navigation display are deleted. In addition, after the game R49 is finished, the high navigation state LMT state is finished, the low navigation state is shifted to the normal state, and the effect image display device 157 is used to display a normal screen corresponding to the low navigation state normal state ( Normal) is displayed.

  In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state (in this example, the judge state and the withdrawal state) After the third advantageous gaming state (in this example, the LMT state) is completed, the game is configured to shift to the normal state (in this example, the low navigation state), and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (in this example) Then, the aspect of AT2 effect) is a different aspect from the effect (in this example, ED effect) in the third advantageous gaming state.

  According to this example, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation.

<AT2 state-> Judge state-> Pull-back state-> AT2 state>
FIG. 93 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of production when the production state transitions in the order of AT2 state → judgment state → retraction state → AT2 state in the high navigation state, and FIG. 92 (a) is used. The continuation of the described production is shown.

  The game R315 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 315 and the remaining number of games in the pull-back state shifted from the judge state is 1, and a specific rare role (in this example, a small role 2 or a small role) This is a game that shifts to the AT2 state from the next game because the internal winning in 3). In this game R315, when the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect state is changed from the judge state to the retracted state using the effect image display device 157. Because of the transition, the normal screen (withdrawal) corresponding to the withdrawal state is displayed.

  The subsequent game R314 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 314 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 9 in the AT2 state shifted from the pullback state. In this game R314, until the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after the BET, etc.), the effect state is changed from the judge state to the AT2 using the effect image display device 157. Since the state has shifted to the state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started, and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state before the update (the count value of the effect state counter) is 50. Display including an image indicating the count value of the performance state counter (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “50G”) is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied in the game R314 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 49, the image showing the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (In this example, an image including the characters “LAST 49G” is displayed).

  In this example, when the state is shifted from the pullback state to the AT state, the state is shifted to the AT2 state which is more advantageous for the player than the AT1 state. Although not shown in the drawing, when a 3-stake bet game is performed after a 2-stake bet game in the retracted state, a transition is made to another high navigation state (for example, the LMT state) without shifting to the AT 2 state. There is a case. Although illustration is omitted, in the case where two betting games are continued in the retracted state, the high navigation state may end and the low navigation state may be shifted without shifting to the AT2 state.

<AT2 state → LMT state → Low navigation state → Normal state → Confirmed notification state → AT1 state>
FIG. 93 (b) shows that in the high navigation state, the performance state transitions in the order of AT2 state → LMT state, then transitions to the normal state of low navigation state, transitions again to the high navigation state, and the rendering state is normal state → It is the figure which showed the flow of the production | presentation at the time of transfer in order of a fixed notification state-> AT1 state, and has shown the continuation of the production demonstrated using FIG.92 (b).

  In this example, after the transition to the normal state of the low navigation state, the transition to the high navigation state is made again, and the effect state transitions in the order of normal state → confirmed notification state → AT1 state.

  The game R658 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 658 and the number of remaining games in the AT1 state that has shifted from the confirmed notification state is 19. In this game R658, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after a BET or the like)), the effect state is changed from the confirmed notification state using the effect image display device 157. Since the AT1 state has started, an AT1 effect corresponding to the start of the AT1 state is started, and the remaining number of games in the AT1 state before the update (the count value of the effect state counter) is 20. Display including an image indicating (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “20G”) is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect state is the AT1 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied in the game R658 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the AT1 effect corresponding to the AT1 state is executed and the remaining number of games in the AT1 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 19, an image showing the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) Is displayed (in this example, an image including the characters “LAST 19G” is displayed).

  In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state (in this example, the judge state and the withdrawal state) After the third advantageous gaming state (in this example, the LMT state) is completed, the game is configured to shift to the normal state (in this example, the low navigation state), and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (in this example) Then, the mode of the AT2 effect) is a mode different from the mode of the effect in the third advantageous game state (in this example, the ED effect), and the operation information from the fourth advantageous game state (the judge state and the pullback state). Is shifted to the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state), and the state after the third advantageous gaming state (LMT state) is completed. Transition to a gaming state in which operation information can be reported Case, (in this example, AT1 state) first advantageous gaming state is configured to shift to.

  According to this example, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation. Moreover, expectation can be given even after the end of an advantageous gaming state that can be expected.

  Further, in this example, when the state shifts from the LMT state to the low navigation state, shifts again to the high navigation state, and shifts to the AT state in the high navigation state, the AT1 state is more disadvantageous for the player than the AT2 state. Configured to migrate.

<Notification when a winning combination is established in the AT2 state>
FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a winning combination is established in the AT2 state.

  The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 328 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 2 in the AT2 state. In this game R328, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). , The AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and the operation navigation (in this example, “2-1-3” is displayed) suggesting the stop operation of the pressing order is executed, and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state Since (the count value of the effect state counter) is 2, a display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “LAST 2G”) is displayed. Running.

  The subsequent game R327 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 327 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is increased from 1 to 51. In this game R327, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). In addition, an AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed, and an unspecified display g2 (in this example, "!-!-!") Cannot be specified because the winning combination (for example, the watermelon of the small role 3) cannot be specified. ) And the remaining number of games in the AT2 state before the addition (the count value of the effect state counter) is 1, and therefore a display including an image showing the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (this example) Then, display of an image including the characters “LAST 1G” is executed.

  Also, in this game R327, after a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted), after effect images are displayed in an unspecified display, the number of games added to AT Since the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) has increased from 1 to 51 due to the AT addition, Display including an image indicating the number of games (count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 51G”) is executed.

  The display mode of the non-specific indication is not limited to this example. For example, the first specific indication (for example, “!-!-!” Is used to indicate the internal winning of the first combination or the second combination of the same type. The second combination of the same type or the internal winning of the third combination is performed with the second non-specific indication (for example, “?-?-?” Display). You may comprise so that an internal winning cannot be specified. In addition, the internal winning of the different types of first role or fourth role is made with the first unspecified indication (for example, “!-!-!” Display), and the same type of second role or third role. It may be configured so that the internal winning of any combination cannot be specified by performing the internal winning of the second with the second unspecified indication (for example, “?-?-?” Display).

<Notification when a winning combination is established in the LMT state>
FIG. 94 (b) is a diagram showing an example of notification when a winning combination is established in the LMT state.

  The game R50 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 50 and the remaining number of games in the LMT state is 1. In this game R50, the effect state is the LMT state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). , An operation navigation that executes an ED effect (ending effect) corresponding to the LMT state and suggests a stop operation of pushing order (in this example, “2-1-3” having the same display mode as the operation navigation in the AT2 state) Display), the total number of games in the LMT state is 20, and the remaining number of games in the LMT state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 2. Therefore, the total number of games in the LMT state and the number of games in the LMT state Display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including the characters “2/20”) Running.

  In addition, in this game R50, using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, a certain time has elapsed since the pressing operation of the start lever 135 was accepted) While performing an identifiable display g1 (in this example, a watermelon symbol display) that can identify the internal winning combination (for example, watermelon of small role 3), the remaining number of games in the LMT state (effect state counter) Since the count value is 1), display including an image indicating the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, display of an image including “1/20” character) is executed. ing.

  Further, in the game R327, the identifiable display is erased when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). In this example, unlike the notification when the winning combination is established in the AT2 state described with reference to FIG. 94A, there is no AT addition (restricted).

  In this example, after the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state in this example) is completed, it is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state (in this example, the judge state and the withdrawal state) After the third advantageous gaming state (in this example, the LMT state) is completed, the game is configured to shift to the normal state (in this example, the low navigation state), and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (in this example) Then, the aspect of the AT2 effect) is different from the effect in the third advantageous game state (in this example, the ED effect), and the lottery result is the first in the third advantageous game state (LMT state). In the case of a combination (in this example, a small combination 2 (watermelon 1)), a first notification (in this example, display of a watermelon symbol) that can identify the first combination is configured to be notified. The lottery result is the first role in the second advantageous gaming state (AT2 state) Case, (in this example, "! -! -!" Display) a second notification indicating that the chances are informed configured to be able to.

  According to this example, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation. Also, in an advantageous gaming state that can be expected, the player is given a sense of expectation, and in an advantageous gaming state that is in a regulated state, the player is comfortably terminated without being overwhelmed and prevented from being overlooked. Can be made.

  The display mode of the identifiable display is not limited to this example. For example, characters suggesting the name of the role (for example, “Rep” indicating the replay, “Watermelon” indicating the small role 3 ) May be displayed, or a part or all of the symbols corresponding to the combination may be displayed. Further, the display area, the display position, the display size, the display timing, the display mode after the display, and the like may be made different between the non-specific display and the specific display.

<Specific example of correction of initial number of AT2>
Next, a specific example of the correction of the AT2 initial number of times described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 90 will be described.

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of times / when correction is performed>
FIG. 95 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the AT2 initial number of times is corrected.
The game R120 is a game with 120 remaining games in the high navigation state and 0 remaining games in the judge state. In this game R120, in the judgment state process B described with reference to FIG. 89A, after the AT2 initial number lottery is performed, it is determined that the correction condition is satisfied in the correction condition determination, and the AT2 initial number is corrected. ing. Specifically, the value (X) of the high navigation state counter at the time of the correction condition determination is 120, the AT2 initial number (Y) selected in the AT2 initial number lottery is 30, and “X (= 120) −Y Since the correction condition of (= 30) <= 100 ”is satisfied, Y (= 30) + 20 = 50 is set as the AT2 correction value, and the LMT standby flag is set ON.

  The game R119 is a game in which the remaining number of games in the high navigation state is 119 and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state that has shifted from the judge state is 50. In this game R119, the AT number addition lottery 2 is performed in the AT2 state processing A described with reference to FIG. 88A because the LMT standby flag is on. Watermelon 1) is won internally, and 0G is selected as the number of games on AT.

  Further, in this game R119, until the certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after the BET or the like)), the effect state is judged as the judgment state. Since the transition from the AT2 state to the AT2 state, the AT2 effect corresponding to the start of the AT2 state is started and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state before the update (the count value of the effect state counter) is 50. Display including an image indicating the number (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying an image including the characters “50G”) is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect state is the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied in the game R119 (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). Since the AT2 effect corresponding to the AT2 state is executed and the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 49, the image showing the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) (In this example, an image including the characters “LAST 49G” is displayed).

  The game R69 is a game with 69 remaining games in the high navigation state and 0 games remaining in the AT2 state. In this game R69, in the AT2 state process B described with reference to FIG. 90, since the AT2 state is ended and the LMT standby flag is on, preparations for shifting the effect state from the AT2 state to the LMT state are performed. ing. Further, in this game R69, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation navigation is executed in the same manner as the games R119 to R70, and the display including an image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter). (In this example, display of an image including the characters “LAST 0G”) is executed.

  Furthermore, this game R69 is the final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted). The display of the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is executed, and the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, while the remaining number of games in the AT2 state ( The display including the image indicating the count value of the effect state counter (display of the image including the characters “LAST 0G” in this example) and the display of the operation navigation are deleted. In this example, the result display 1 may be configured not to be displayed, or the result display 1 may be configured only when the initial number of AT2 correction is not performed.

  In this example, since the AT2 initial number of times is corrected, the AT2 state and the LMT state can be transitioned seamlessly (without passing through other effect states).

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial number of times / When displaying the number of remaining games in AT2 state>
FIG. 95 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when performing the display of the number of remaining games in the AT2 state.
The game R328 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 328 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 52. In the game R328, the AT number addition lottery 1 is performed in the AT2 state process A described with reference to FIG. 88A because the LMT standby flag is off. Watermelon 1) is won internally, and 50G is selected as the number of games on AT.

  In the game R328, the AT2 effect is executed and the operation is performed using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). While performing the navigation, without displaying the image indicating the remaining number of games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, displaying the image including the characters “LAST 52G”) As a fake display (gasse display), a display (in this example, “LAST 2G” that includes an image indicating the number of remaining games (in this example, 2) before adding the number of AT-added games (in this example, 50) is added. Display of images including the characters "".

  The subsequent game R327 is a game with 327 remaining games in the high navigation state and 51 remaining games in the AT2 state. In this game R327, an AT2 effect is executed in the same manner as in the game R328 using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). In addition, while performing the operation navigation, a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, an image including the characters “LAST 51G”) is performed. Instead, as a false display (gase display), a display (in this example, including an image showing the remaining number of games (in this example, 1) before adding the number of AT-added games (in this example, 50) is added. (Displaying an image including the characters “LAST 1G”).

  Further, in this game R327, a display that suggests an AT addition (in this example, “a certain time has elapsed since the pressing operation of the start lever 135) has been established (in this example,“ Display of the number of games added to the AT when another certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation has been accepted). In this example, “+ 50G” is displayed), and a display including an image indicating the number of remaining games in the true (true) AT2 state (the count value of the effect state counter) (in this example, “LAST 51G”) is displayed. Display of images including the characters "".

<Specific example of correction of the initial number of AT2 / When displaying the result in transition to the AT2 state>
FIG. 96 (a) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when a result is displayed after transition to the AT2 state.
The game R326 is a game in which the number of remaining games in the high navigation state is 326 and the number of remaining games in the AT2 state is 0. In this game R326, when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used as an opportunity to perform AT2 similarly to the games R328 to R327. Display including an image indicating the number of remaining games (count value of the effect state counter) in the AT2 state while executing the effect and operating navigation (in this example, displaying an image including characters “LAST 0G”) ) Is running.

  Furthermore, this game R326 is a final game in the AT2 state using the effect image display device 157 when a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the third stop operation is accepted). While the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is displayed, the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is not executed.

  The subsequent game R325 is a game in which the number of remaining games is 325 in the high navigation state and the number of remaining games is 9 in the judge state shifted from the AT2 state. In the game R325, until a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, until a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted (immediately after a BET or the like)), the result display 1 in the AT2 state is displayed using the effect image display device 157 ( For example, the display of the number of acquired game media) is executed and triggered by the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (in this example, the pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted), the effect image display device 157 is used, An image showing the number of games (the count value of the effect state counter) since the number of remaining games in the judge state (the count value of the effect state counter) is 9 while the judge effect corresponding to the start of the judge state is started. (In this example, an image including the characters “LAST 9G” is displayed).

<Specific example of correction of AT2 initial count / When result display is not performed after completion of AT2 state>
FIG. 96 (b) is a diagram showing the flow of effects when the result display is not performed after the end of the AT2 state, and corresponds to FIG. 95 (a).
In the effect described with reference to FIG. 95 (a), in the game R69, the effect image display device 157 is used to display the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state because it is the final game in the AT2 state. In this example, the result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is executed, but in this example, in the same game R69, the AT2 end effect screen corresponding to the end of the AT2 state is shown. The result display 1 in the AT2 state (for example, display of the number of acquired game media) is not executed.

  According to this example, since the transition from the AT2 state to the LMT state can be performed seamlessly (without passing through other performance states), and the result display in the AT2 state is not performed at the time of transition, the AT2 state is changed to the LMT state. This makes it possible to give the player a comprehensive impression of the performance in the high navigation state without making the player more aware of the transition.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “the present invention 2-1”) has an operating means (for example, shown in FIG. 1). Stop button 137 to 139) and shift to one of a normal state (for example, a low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B). Control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3), and the operation information of the operation means (for example, the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45) is used. The operation navigation, the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 52, etc. are configured to be able to notify the stop position and stop order of each reel), and the advantageous state is Regarding the notification of operation information Each time the game is performed in the advantageous state, the specific counter is provided with a specific counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIGS. 18 and 52). The count value is configured to be updateable, and is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied. This is a condition that is satisfied when the first specific value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state reaches the upper limit number). It is configured to be able to shift to any one of the advantageous gaming states, and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state that can notify the operation information ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a “second advantageous gaming state.” For example, the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97 or the AT2 state shown in FIG. This advantageous gaming state is a certain advantageous gaming state different from the second advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “third advantageous gaming state”) that can notify the operation information. For example, FIG. Three advantageous game states, and the LMT state shown in FIG. 6B, etc., and one advantageous game state among the plurality of advantageous game states is the second advantageous game state and the third advantageous game state. In an advantageous gaming state different from any of the gaming states (hereinafter referred to as “fourth advantageous gaming state”, for example, the fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 97, the pullback state shown in FIG. 6B, etc.). The fourth advantageous gaming state includes the second advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. It is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous with respect to the notification of the operation information than any advantageous gaming state of the three advantageous gaming states, and the third advantageous gaming state has a count value of a second specific value (for example, 19 ) Is a gaming state that can be shifted from the second advantageous gaming state, and is an advantageous gaming state in which the user can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value. The specific value and the second specific value are different values, and are configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state after the second advantageous gaming state ends, After the advantageous gaming state is completed, the normal state is entered, and the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 97, the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.). In the third advantageous gaming state. That effect (for example, ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 97, ED effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.) are different aspects and embodiments of it is the amusement machine according to claim. In addition, FIG. 97 is a figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 2-1.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 2-1, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation.

  One advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a certain advantageous gaming state that can notify the operation information and is different from any of the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state. (Hereinafter referred to as “first advantageous gaming state”), and the first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous with respect to the notification of the operation information than the second advantageous gaming state. Good.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the invention 2-2 of the present application”) has an operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 139), and a control means for shifting to any one of a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) ( For example, a gaming machine having a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3, and operating information of the operating means (for example, an operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, FIG. 52), the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157, etc., is configured so that the stop position and stop order of each reel can be identified), and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. More advantageous than the normal state with respect to A specific counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and the count value of the specific counter is updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. And configured so as to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is such that the count value is a first specific value. This is a condition that is satisfied when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state has reached the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state, The advantageous game state of the plurality of advantageous game states is a certain advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as “first game state” in which the operation information can be notified). of For example, the first advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98 or the AT1 state shown in FIG. 6B), and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is: A certain advantageous gaming state different from the first advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “second advantageous gaming state”) capable of reporting the operation information. For example, the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 6 (b), etc., and one of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state in which the operation information can be notified. In an advantageous gaming state different from any of the advantageous gaming states (hereinafter referred to as “third advantageous gaming state”, the third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 98, the LMT state shown in FIG. 6B, etc.). There is one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states. A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “fourth advantageous gaming state”) that is different from any of the one advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state. The fourth advantageous game state shown in FIG. 98 and the pull-back state shown in FIG. 6B, etc.), and the fourth advantageous game state includes the first advantageous game state and the second advantageous game state. And the third advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous with respect to the notification of the operation information than the advantageous gaming state of any of the third advantageous gaming states, and the third advantageous gaming state has a count value of a second specific value ( For example, in the gaming state that can be shifted from the second advantageous gaming state in the case of 19), the gaming state can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value. The one specific value and the second specific value are different values, and are configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state after the second advantageous gaming state ends, After the three advantageous game states are over, the normal state is entered. The aspect of the second advantageous game state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 98, the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.) is the effect in the third advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 98 is different from the aspect of the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 98 and the ED effect shown in FIG. 92 and the like, and the second advantageous game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous game state. In the case of shifting from the fourth advantageous gaming state to a gaming state in which the operation information can be notified, it is configured to shift to the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state is The gaming machine is configured to shift to the first advantageous gaming state when shifting to a gaming state in which the operation information can be notified from a state after the game is finished. In addition, FIG. 98 is a figure which showed the outline | summary of this invention 2-2.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 2-2, since an advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easily understood, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with a sense of expectation. Moreover, expectation can be given even after the end of an advantageous gaming state that can be expected.

  Further, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the invention of the present application (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the invention 2-3 of the present application”) has an operation means (for example, the stop buttons 137 to 137 shown in FIG. 139), and a control means for shifting to any one of a normal state (for example, the low navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) and an advantageous state (for example, the high navigation state shown in FIG. 6B) ( For example, a gaming machine having a main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3, and operating information of the operating means (for example, an operation navigation using the payout number display 127 shown in FIGS. 8 and 45, FIG. 52), the operation navigation using the effect image display device 157, etc., is configured so that the stop position and stop order of each reel can be identified), and the advantageous state is the notification of the operation information. More advantageous than the normal state with respect to A specific counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation state counter shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 52), and the count value of the specific counter is updated each time a game is played in the advantageous state. And configured so as to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state when a certain end condition is satisfied, and the certain end condition is such that the count value is a first specific value. This is a condition that is satisfied when a value (for example, 0) is reached (for example, when the number of games after the transition to the advantageous state has reached the upper limit number), and in the advantageous state, The advantageous game state is one of the plurality of advantageous game states. The advantageous game state of the plurality of advantageous game states is a certain advantageous game state (hereinafter referred to as “second”) that can notify the operation information. of For example, the second advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99 or the AT2 state shown in FIG. 6B, etc., and one advantageous gaming state among the plurality of advantageous gaming states is: A certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “third advantageous gaming state”) that is capable of notifying the operation information and different from the second advantageous gaming state. For example, the third advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. LMT state shown in FIG. 6B, etc., and one advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is different from both the second advantageous gaming state and the third advantageous gaming state. It is a certain advantageous gaming state (hereinafter referred to as “fourth advantageous gaming state”. For example, the fourth advantageous gaming state shown in FIG. 99, the withdrawal state shown in FIG. 6B, etc.), The advantageous game state includes the second advantageous game state and the third advantageous game state. It is an advantageous gaming state that is more disadvantageous with respect to the notification of the operation information than any advantageous gaming state of the state, and in the third advantageous gaming state, the count value becomes a second specific value (for example, 19) A gaming state that can be shifted from the second advantageous gaming state, and is an advantageous gaming state in which the user can stay until the count value reaches the first specific value, and the first specific value and The second specific value is a different value, and is configured to be able to shift to the fourth advantageous gaming state after the second advantageous gaming state ends, and the third advantageous gaming state is After the end, it is configured to shift to the normal state, and the aspect of the effect in the second advantageous gaming state (for example, the AT2 effect ad2 shown in FIG. 99, the AT2 effect shown in FIG. 92, etc.) Production in the third advantageous gaming state (for example, 99 is different from the ED effect ed1 shown in FIG. 99 and the ED effect shown in FIG. 92 and the like, and the lottery result is the first combination (for example, shown in FIG. 5) in the third advantageous gaming state. In the case of a small combination 2 (watermelon 1)), a first notification that can specify the first combination (for example, the second image g1 shown in FIG. 99 or the identifiable display shown in FIG. 94B). g1 (display of watermelon symbol)), and when the lottery result is the first combination in the second advantageous gaming state, a second notification indicating that it is a chance (For example, the second image g2 shown in FIG. 99 or the unidentifiable display g2 shown in FIG. -! -! ")"). FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 2-3 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 2-3, it is easy to understand the advantageous gaming state that can be expected, so that the player can have a sense of expectation and perform the game. Also, in an advantageous gaming state that can be expected, the player is given a sense of expectation, and in an advantageous gaming state that is in a regulated state, the player is comfortably terminated without being overwhelmed and prevented from being overlooked. Can be made.

  The gaming machines according to the inventions 2-1 to 2-3 of the present application are not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 10) for performing a lottery process on the internal winning of the combination and determining a lottery result is provided, and the lottery result is the first combination, The certain notification mode in the third advantageous gaming state may be different from the certain notification mode in the second advantageous gaming state. .

  Further, when the lottery result is the second combination (for example, the small combination 4 (bell) shown in FIG. 5A or FIG. 7), the operation information can be notified, The mode of notification of the operation information of the second combination in the advantageous game state may be the same as the mode of notification of the operation information of the second combination in the second advantageous game state.

  With such a configuration, the operation navigation mode does not change depending on the type of advantageous gaming state, so that it is possible to prevent the push order from being missed and to maintain the player's willingness to play. Further, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation.

  The operation information may be information that can identify the stop position and stop order of each reel that can display the combination of symbols related to the second combination.

  Further, in the second advantageous gaming state, the number of remaining games in the second advantageous gaming state can be increased, and in the third advantageous gaming state, the number of remaining games in the third advantageous gaming state can be increased. You may be comprised so that the number of remaining games may not be increased.

  With such a configuration, in the advantageous gaming state in the restricted state, the advantageous state can be ended comfortably without causing the player to be more than necessary. Further, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation.

  It is configured so that a display indicating that the number of remaining games in the second advantageous gaming state is increased may be performed, and the number of remaining games in the third advantageous gaming state is increased. It may be configured so that there is no case where the display indicating is performed.

  In addition, when the second advantageous gaming state ends, a certain end display (for example, an AT end screen indicating the end of the AT2 state shown in FIG. 92 or the like) can be displayed. A process of restricting the transition to the third advantageous gaming state after the transition to the second advantageous gaming state and before the certain end indication relating to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed. (For example, the process using the LMT standby flag described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91) may be configured to be executable.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the profit in the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is not taken and satisfy the player's satisfaction, and as a result, the player has a sense of expectation. It becomes possible. Further, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation.

  Further, it may be configured such that a certain freeze effect can be executed when the state shifts to the third advantageous gaming state.

  With such a configuration, an advantageous gaming state that should not be expected can be easily understood, so that the player can be given a chance to change their feelings. Further, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation.

  The initial remaining number of games in the second advantageous gaming state is variable (for example, the number of games determined by the AT2 initial number lottery in FIG. 89 (a), the game corrected by the number of games shown in FIG. 89 (b). The initial remaining number of games in the third advantageous gaming state may be fixed (for example, 20G).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to end the advantageous state comfortably without hitting in the advantageous gaming state of the restricted state. Further, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the second advantageous game state, a display indicating the number of times less than the actual remaining number of games in the second advantageous game state (for example, a display of the number of remaining games shown in FIG. 95 (b)). (False display)) may be displayed, and in the third advantageous gaming state, a display indicating the number of times less than the actual remaining number of games in the third advantageous gaming state May be configured not to be displayed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to end the advantageous state comfortably without hitting in the advantageous gaming state of the restricted state. Further, since the advantageous gaming state that can be expected is easy to understand, it is possible to make the player play a game with a sense of expectation.

  Further, in the one advantageous state, after the third advantageous gaming state is finished, the fourth advantageous gaming state (for example, the withdrawal state) may not be changed.

  In addition, a first game (for example, three betting games) in which the number of game media bets is the first number and a second game (for example, two bets in which the number of game media bets is the second number). The second number is different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game. It is a game, and when the second game is performed, the transition to the second advantageous game state may not be started.

  With such a configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is being played in the first game or the second game depending on whether or not the state is shifted to the second advantageous game state. In some cases, the first game may be more advantageous to the player than the second game.

  Moreover, when not changing to the advantageous game state which can alert | report the said operation information from the said 4th advantageous game state, you may be comprised so that it can transfer to the said normal state.

  The above-mentioned “the second advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the first advantageous gaming state” means “acquisition of game media in one of the first advantageous gaming states” It may be that the expected value of the game medium to be acquired in the second advantageous gaming state is higher than the expected value.

  In addition, the above-mentioned “fourth advantageous game state is more informed of the operation information than any of the first advantageous game state, the second advantageous game state, and the third advantageous game state. "The fourth advantageous gaming state is any advantage of the first advantageous gaming state, the second advantageous gaming state, and the third advantageous gaming state." The operation information may be reported less frequently than the gaming state, or it may be an advantageous gaming state in which the operation information is not notified.

[Embodiment 3]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
In order to avoid redundant description, only the configuration different from the gaming machines according to Embodiments 1 and 2 will be described in principle. In addition, FIGS. 100 to 107 are used only in the description of the third embodiment in principle, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the third embodiment does not include FIGS. The reference numeral 107 is prioritized.

<Various operations>
First, various operations that can be performed in the slot machine according to the third embodiment will be described.
The slot machine according to the third embodiment includes a start key 135, stop buttons 137 to 139, bet buttons 130 to 132, a medal return button 133, a settlement button 134 described with reference to FIG. In addition, operation means such as a PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 102 is provided, and various operations can be performed by these operation means. Further, in addition to various operations by these operation means, an insertion operation by inserting a medal from the medal insertion port 141 is also possible.

  Hereinafter, the operation using the start lever 135 may be referred to as “lever operation”, the operation using the PUSH button 194 may be referred to as “PUSH button operation”, and the operation using the cross key 192 may be referred to as “cross key operation”.

<State transition of various operations>
Next, an example of state transition of various operations will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating state transitions of the push button operation, the cross key operation, the closing operation, and the lever operation.

  In FIG. 100, a state indicated by “◯” is a state in which the acceptance of various operations is valid, and a state indicated by “x” in the drawing is a state in which the acceptance of various operations is invalid. The slot machine according to the third embodiment is configured to determine whether various operations are valid or invalid according to the state transition shown in the figure, and to display a corresponding display when the operations are valid.

  For example, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is displayed (or not displayed), and the setting screen is not displayed, the operation with the cross key 192 corresponding to “call setting screen” is effective. When the operation is accepted, the display of the setting screen is started (calling the setting screen), but the push button operation, the closing operation, and the lever operation are invalid, so that the operation is performed. , Setting screen display does not start (does not call setting screen).

  Also, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is not displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the insertion operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination” is valid. Determines the AT2 effect character (AT2 type determination), which will be described later, but since the push button operation, the cross key operation, and the lever operation are invalid, even if the operation is performed, the character of the AT2 effect character is determined. No decision (AT2 type decision) is made.

  On the other hand, when the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the PUSH button operation is also enabled in addition to the input operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination”. Even when a button operation is accepted, the character for the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination).

  When the previous game is not replayed, the selection screen is not displayed, and the setting screen is displayed, any of the push button operation, cross key operation, input operation, and lever operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination” is performed. Since it is invalid, the character cannot be determined. However, since the operation other than the lever operation corresponding to “AT2 type selection screen display” is effective, the character can be selected by an operation other than the lever operation.

  If the previous game is replay, the selection screen is not displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the lever operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination” is valid. The AT2 effect character (AT2 type determination) is determined, but the push button operation, the cross key operation, and the input operation are invalid, so that the AT2 effect character determination (AT2) is performed even if the operation is performed. Type determination) is not performed.

  On the other hand, when the previous game is replay, the selection screen is displayed, and the setting screen is not displayed, the PUSH button operation is also enabled in addition to the input operation corresponding to “AT2 type determination”. Even when the operation is accepted, the character for the AT2 effect is determined (AT2 type determination). In these cases, the input operation is invalid. However, the input operation may be validated, and the AT2 effect character (AT2 type determination) may be determined when the operation is accepted.

<Specific examples of various operations>
Next, specific examples of various operations including a PUSH button operation, a cross key operation, a closing operation, and a lever operation will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 101A is a diagram showing an example of various operations for switching the display between the normal screen and the demonstration screen in time series.
In this example, when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the normal screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157, the display of the setting screen is started. Here, the setting screen is a screen for performing various settings related to the slot machine (for example, volume adjustment, light amount adjustment, model information display, etc.).

  The condition for starting the display of the setting screen is not particularly limited, but in this example, the display of the setting screen is started only when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted during non-game, When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received, the setting screen display is not started.

  When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted while the setting screen is displayed, the display of the demonstration screen is started. Here, the demonstration screen is a screen mainly displayed during non-games, for example, a screen for displaying introduction of a new model, advertisement / advertisement of a game store, and the like. When a medal insertion operation to the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted during the display of this demonstration screen, the normal screen display starts (returns from the demonstration screen to the normal screen).

FIG. 101B is a diagram showing an example of various operations in time series when performing volume adjustment using the setting screen.
In this example, when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received while the normal screen is displayed using the effect image display device 157, the display of the setting screen is started. When the operation of the upper button 192b (or the lower button 192c) of the cross key 192 is accepted while the setting screen is displayed, the cursor (arrow) displayed on the setting screen moves upward (or downward). In this example, since the operation of the up button 192b is accepted on the setting screen, the cursor is moved upward to the volume adjustment position.

  When the cursor is moved to a certain menu, display of a submenu corresponding to the cursor is started. In this example, since the cursor has been moved to the volume adjustment position, the display of the volume adjustment screen corresponding to the volume adjustment is started. When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. . In this example, since the operation of the right button 192d is accepted once on the volume adjustment screen, the volume is increased by one level (in this example, the level is increased from level 3 to level 4 in five levels of levels 1 to 5). ) And the adjusted volume (level 4) is displayed by the volume meter.

  When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume adjustment is terminated and the setting screen is restored. In this example, since the operation of the enter button 192a is accepted after the volume adjustment, the volume adjustment is terminated and the display of the volume adjustment screen is switched to the display of the setting screen. Subsequently, since the operation of the down button 192c on the setting screen is accepted, the cursor is moved downward to the “return” position. Note that the subsequent operation and display are the same as those described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 101C is a diagram illustrating an example of various operations in time series when performing volume adjustment without displaying the setting screen.
In this example, when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is received while the normal image is displayed using the effect image display device 157, the display of the volume adjustment screen is started.

  The condition for starting the display of the volume adjustment screen is not particularly limited, but in this example, the volume adjustment screen is displayed only when the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted during non-game. When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted during the game, the display of the volume adjustment screen is not started.

  When the operation of the right button 192d (or the left button 192e) of the cross key 192 is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume can be adjusted and the adjusted volume is displayed by the volume meter. This is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. Further, when the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume adjustment is terminated and the screen returns to the volume adjustment end screen indicating that the volume has been determined. When the operation of the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is accepted while the volume adjustment end screen is displayed, the display of the demonstration screen is started.

FIG. 101D and FIG. 101E are diagrams showing examples of other various operations in time series.
In the example described with reference to FIG. 101A, when a medal insertion operation to the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted during display of the demonstration screen, the display of the normal screen is started (return from the demonstration screen to the normal screen). ) As an example, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), when a medal insertion operation to the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted while the setting screen is displayed, the normal screen display is started (from the demonstration screen to the normal screen). It may be configured to return to the screen.

  In the example described with reference to FIG. 101 (B), when an operation for inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted during display of the demo screen after volume adjustment, display of the normal screen is started (demo screen). In the example shown in FIG. 101 (E), when an operation for inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 141 is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the normal screen is displayed. It may be configured to start (return from the demo screen to the normal screen). In this case, if the input operation is accepted after the volume adjustment end screen is displayed, the volume may not be adjusted because the volume has not been determined. Even before the display (even before the volume is determined), the volume may be adjusted with the volume displayed on the volume adjustment screen during the input operation.

<Specific example of character selection operation>
Next, a specific example of the character selection operation (hereinafter also referred to as “character selection operation”) will be described with reference to FIGS.
Here, the character selection operation is an operation for selecting a character to appear in various effects according to the player's preference. In the slot machine according to the third embodiment, the character selection operation is performed by the above-described various operations. It can be performed.

<Specific example of character selection operation / Example in which character cannot be selected by player's intention>
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the character selection operation in a time series when the performance state is shifted from the judgment state to the AT2 state in the high navigation state, and FIG. FIG.

  In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen indicating that the transition to the AT2 state is confirmed, the character selection operation screen for performing the character selection operation in the AT2 state is displayed. Has started. Although the display mode of the character selection operation screen is not particularly limited, in this example, the player can select a favorite character from the three types of characters A, B, and C. Is displayed (default), the character A is temporarily selected.

  When the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted while the character selection operation screen is displayed, the operation becomes a character determination operation, and the character temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen becomes a character appearing in the AT2 effect executed in the AT2 state. It is determined. Thereby, in the AT2 state, the effect by the character determined by the player is started.

  In this example, since the character A is temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined as the character A by the character determination operation, and the AT2 effect by the character A is started. Subsequently, when an insertion operation (or BET operation) is performed in a state where the AT2 effect is started and a pressing operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, the first game in the AT2 state is started.

FIG. 102B is a diagram showing Example 2 of the character selection operation in time series.
In this example, since the insertion operation was accepted during the display of the AT2 confirmation display screen, the default character is displayed without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player the opportunity to select a favorite character). AT2 production by A has started.

FIG. 102C is a diagram showing Example 3 of the character selection operation in time series.
In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 has been accepted while the AT2 confirmation display screen is being displayed, the display of the character selection operation screen has started, but the input operation has been accepted while the character selection operation screen is being displayed. Thus, the AT2 effect by the default character A is started without selecting a character on the character selection operation screen (without giving the player an opportunity to select a favorite character).

  FIG. 102 (D) is a diagram showing a fourth example of character selection operation in time series. In this example, since the right button 192d of the cross key 192 is received during the display of the AT2 confirmation display screen, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. However, the input operation is received during the display of the volume adjustment screen. Therefore, the AT2 effect by the default character A is started without displaying the character selection operation screen (without giving the player the opportunity to select a favorite character).

<Specific example of character selection operation / Example in which character can be selected by player's intention>
FIG. 103 (A) is a diagram showing Example 5 of character selection operation in time series. In this example, since the operation of the PUSH button 194 is accepted during the display of the AT2 confirmation display screen, the display of the character selection operation screen cd1 is started, and the right button of the cross key 192 is displayed during the display of this character selection operation screen cd1. Since 192d is accepted, the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed. In this example, since the input operation has been accepted while the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed, after the character selection operation screen cd1 is displayed again, the input operation is received while the character selection operation screen cd1 is displayed. Even so, the input operation is not accepted as a character determination operation (a character is not selected against the player's intention), and the display of the character selection operation screen cd1 is maintained.

  Then, when a press operation (lever operation) of the start lever 135 is accepted during the display of the character selection operation screen cd1, a character that notifies that the character (character A in this example) to be displayed in the AT2 effect has been determined. After displaying the decision screen ed1, the AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

FIG. 103 (B) is a diagram showing Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series.
In this example, the flow until the character selection operation screen cd1 is redisplayed after the volume adjustment screen sd1 is displayed is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 103A, but the character selection operation screen cd1 after the redisplay is displayed. Since the operation of the PUSH button 194, that is, the character determination operation is accepted during the display, the character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined as the character A temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, and appears in the AT2 effect. After displaying the character determination screen ed1 notifying that the character (character A in this example) has been determined, the AT2 effect in which the character appears is started.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 104 (A) to 104 (C), the push button 194 is composed of a button that can emit light, and the push button 194 is made to emit light when the character selection operation screen can be displayed. is doing.

FIG. 104A is a diagram showing Example 6 of the character selection operation in time series.
In this example, since the character selection operation screen can be displayed while the AT2 confirmation display screen is displayed, the non-light-emitting PUSH button 194 that has been turned off is caused to emit light and the operation of the PUSH button 194 (character selection operation) is performed. When the screen calling operation is accepted, display of the character selection operation screen is started. Further, since the character selection operation screen can be displayed even while the character selection operation screen is displayed, the push button 194 is caused to emit light, and the operation (character determination operation) of the push button 194 is accepted. The character appearing in the AT2 effect is determined to be the character A temporarily selected on the character selection operation screen, and the AT2 effect by the character A is started. Further, during the AT2 effect, since the character selection operation screen cannot be displayed, the PUSH button 194 is turned off.

FIG. 104B is a diagram showing Example 7 of character selection operation in time series.
In this example, the PUSH button 194 is turned off because the character selection operation screen cannot be displayed while the volume adjustment screen and the demonstration screen are displayed. In this example, while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the volume adjustment end screen is displayed when the enter button 192a of the cross key 192 is received. For example, the volume adjustment screen displays a certain time (for example, 10 When the second) elapses, the display of the volume adjustment end screen may be started.

FIG. 104C is a diagram showing Example 8 of the character selection operation in time series.
In this example, the flow until the volume adjustment end screen is displayed is the same as the example described with reference to FIG. 104B. However, when the operation of the PUSH button 194 (not shown) is accepted, the AT2 confirmation display screen is displayed. Is displayed again, and the character selection operation screen can be displayed during the display. Therefore, the non-light-emitting PUSH button 194 that has been turned off is caused to emit light.

<Specific example / variation of character selection operation>
FIG. 105 (A) is a diagram showing modification 1 of the character selection operation in time series.
In this example, after the character selection operation screen is displayed, a selection determination effect for notifying information on the character selected on the character selection operation screen (character A in this example) is performed. With such a configuration, the player can confirm whether or not the desired character is selected before the production is started, and the player's interest may be enhanced.

FIG. 105 (B) is a diagram showing a second modification of the character selection operation in time series.
In this example, since the input operation is accepted while a screen other than the character selection operation screen is displayed, the character selection operation screen is not displayed (the player is not given an opportunity to select a favorite character), and is the default. Since the AT2 effect by the character A is started, the selection decision effect is not performed. With such a configuration, even if the player is not given an opportunity to select a favorite character, the discouragement of the player may be reduced.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “the present invention 3-1”) can display a plurality of types of displays. A gaming machine comprising means, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display prompting an operation for a first decision (hereinafter referred to as “first display”). For example, the first display d1 shown in FIG. 106 and the character selection operation screen cd1 shown in FIG. 103 (A), where one of the plurality of types of display is an operation for the second determination. Display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”. For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG. 106, the volume adjustment screen sd1 shown in FIG. 103A), and the first display is displayed. The first operation (e.g. 106, a certain operation h1 shown in FIG. 106, an input operation shown in FIG. 103A, an operation of the push button 194, an operation of a plurality of buttons provided in the cross key 192, When a plurality of operations are performed, the determination regarding the first determination (for example, selection of a character to appear in a certain effect) is configured to be executable, and the first display is displayed. The second display is configured to be able to start display, and the display is started after the first display is started and before the determination regarding the first determination is executed. In a state where the second display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first state”), the determination regarding the first determination is not performed even if the first operation is performed. That It is a game table for the butterflies. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an outline of Invention 3-1 of the present application.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 3-1, it is possible to carefully make a decision regarding the previous determination (determination regarding the first determination). In addition, after the second display, there is a possibility that the contents of the first display may be forgotten, and when the determination regarding the first display becomes unintended by the player (for example, at the start of the game) There is an operation (if it is inadvertently determined by inserting a medal into the slot, or pressing the insertion button). Is possible.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention 3-1 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is ended, The determination regarding the first determination may not be executed.

  With such a configuration, even after the display of the operation display regarding the subsequent determination is finished, the determination regarding the previous determination (determination regarding the first determination) can be carefully performed. This is because, after the second display, the previously displayed content (the content of the first display) may be forgotten, for example, the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination regarding the first display If the operations are the same, an unintended determination may be performed by performing a determination operation repeated operation (for example, repeated hitting operation). Even if the determination operation related to the second display and the determination operation related to the first display are not the same, it is not intended when the determination operation related to the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display. Decisions may be made. According to the present invention, such an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  Note that when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is finished, and after the display of the second display is finished, the first display is performed during the first display. Even if the above operation is performed, the determination regarding the first determination may not be executed.

  In addition, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is ended, The determination regarding one determination is not executed, but when the second operation is performed, the determination regarding the first determination is configured to be executable, and the first operation and the second operation are different operations. There may be.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player and to make a decision regarding the previous determination (determination regarding the first determination) carefully. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and earn time, and during that time, the first display can be reminded. In addition, since a determination regarding the previous determination (determination regarding the first determination) may be performed by a lever operation subsequent to the throwing operation, it is possible to provide a smooth determination method for a player who is used to a game it can. Further, an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  Note that when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is finished, and after the display of the second display is finished, the first display is performed during the first display. Even if the above operation is performed, the determination relating to the first determination is not executed, but if a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”) is performed, the first operation is performed. The determination regarding one determination may be configured to be executable.

  In addition, when an operation unit (for example, a PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103 (B) or the like) that may be used for production is provided and the first display is displayed, the operation unit is operated. The determination on the first determination is configured to be executable, and when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and the display of the second display When the operation means is operated after completion, the determination regarding the first determination may be executed.

  With such a configuration, the determination relating to the first determination can be executed without being influenced by the display state by an operation unit that may be used for production. In addition, since the operation means that may be used for production makes it possible to make a stable decision, it is possible to entertain the effect by focusing attention on the operation means for players who are not interested in the operation means. There are cases where it is possible. Further, an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  The operation means that may be used for production may be an operation means capable of adjusting the volume of a sound output means (for example, a speaker), or a light output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device). It is also possible to use an operation means capable of adjusting the amount of light and adjusting the brightness.

  One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, a screen indicating that the AT2 state is confirmed), and the fourth display is displayed from the state where the fourth display is displayed. When the first operation is performed in a state where the fourth display is displayed, the determination regarding the first determination can be performed. May be configured.

  With such a configuration, the determination regarding the first determination can be performed smoothly. It is also possible to provide a smooth determination method for players who are used to games. Further, an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  Further, the second display can be started in a state where the fourth display is displayed, and the first display is displayed after the fourth display is started. Even if the first operation is performed in a state in which the second display that has been displayed before being displayed is displayed, the determination regarding the first determination may be executed. Good.

  With such a configuration, the determination regarding the first determination can be performed smoothly. It is also possible to provide a smooth determination method for players who are used to games. In addition, in a state where the first display can be displayed, a player who displays the second display without displaying the first display may not be interested in the determination regarding the first display. Such a player can be determined smoothly. Further, an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  In addition, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing related to the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the combination is not related to the insertion of game media. Includes a re-gamer capable of performing a re-game and is configured to display both the first display and the second display in a state in which execution of the re-play cannot be started. In a state where the replay can be started, only the first display of the first display and the second display may be displayed.

  Further, in the state in which the execution of the replay can be started and the first display is displayed, the determination regarding the first determination is not performed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured as follows.

  Further, in the state in which the execution of the replay can be started and the fourth display is displayed, the determination regarding the first determination is not performed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, one of the plural types of displays is a third display (for example, an interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the third display is a display composed of a plurality of scene displays. The display of the plurality of scenes includes a display of a first scene and a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene includes the first display in a state where the first display is displayed. The display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed. There may be a display in some cases.

  In addition, a first game (for example, three betting games) in which the number of game media bets is the first number and a second game (for example, two bets in which the number of game media bets is the second number). The second number is different from the first number, and the first game is more advantageous for the player than the second game. In the first state of the first game, the determination regarding the first determination is not performed even if the first operation is performed, and the second game In the first state, the determination regarding the first determination may not be executed even if the first operation is performed.

  With this configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is being played in the first game or the second game depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. In some cases, the first game may be more advantageous to the player than the second game.

  In addition, a gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present invention (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “the present invention 3-2”) includes a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. A gaming machine, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine, and one of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts an operation for a first determination (hereinafter referred to as “first display”). , A first display d1 shown in FIG. 107 and a character selection operation screen cd1 shown in FIG. 103 (B), wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a display prompting an operation for the second determination ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “second display.” For example, the second display d2 shown in FIG.107 and the volume adjustment screen sd1 shown in FIG. Display after the decision regarding the first decision ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “third display.” For example, in the third display d3 shown in FIG.107 and the character determination screen ed1 shown in FIG.103 (B), the first display is displayed. First operation (for example, an operation h1 shown in FIG. 107, an input operation shown in FIG. 103 (B), an operation of a push button 194, an operation of a plurality of buttons provided in the cross key 192, When a plurality of these operations are performed, the third display can be displayed, and the second display can be started while the first display is displayed. The second display that is displayed after the first display is started and before the third display is displayed is displayed ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as “first state”. In, even if the first operation is performed, the third display is configured so that it does not appear, it is the amusement machine according to claim. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an outline of the present invention 3-2.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present invention 3-2, it is possible to make a decision regarding the previous determination (determination regarding the first determination) carefully. In addition, after the second display, there is a possibility that the contents of the first display may be forgotten, and when the determination regarding the first display becomes unintended by the player (for example, at the start of the game) There is an operation (if it is inadvertently determined by inserting a medal into the slot, or pressing the insertion button). Is possible.

  Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention 3-2 is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment. Therefore, for example, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is ended, The third display may be configured not to be displayed.

  With such a configuration, even after the display of the operation display regarding the subsequent determination is finished, the determination regarding the previous determination (determination regarding the first determination) can be carefully performed. This is because, after the second display, the previously displayed content (the content of the first display) may be forgotten, for example, the determination operation regarding the second display and the determination regarding the first display If the operations are the same, an unintended determination may be performed by performing a determination operation repeated operation (for example, repeated hitting operation). Even if the determination operation related to the second display and the determination operation related to the first display are not the same, it is not intended when the determination operation related to the first display is inadvertently performed after the display of the second display. Decisions may be made. According to the present invention, such an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  Note that when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is finished, and after the display of the second display is finished, the first display is performed during the first display. Even if the above operation is performed, the third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is ended, and even if the first operation is performed after the display of the second display is ended, Although the third display is not displayed, the third display can be displayed when a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”) is performed. Good.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the player and to make a decision regarding the previous determination (determination regarding the first determination) carefully. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity and earn time, and during that time, the first display can be reminded. In addition, since a determination regarding the previous determination (determination regarding the first determination) may be performed by a lever operation subsequent to the throwing operation, it is possible to provide a smooth determination method for a player who is used to a game it can. Further, an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  Note that when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display is finished, and after the display of the second display is finished, the first display is performed during the first display. The third display is not displayed even if the operation is performed. However, if a certain operation different from the first operation (hereinafter referred to as “second operation”) is performed, the third display is not performed. The display may be configured to be displayable.

  In addition, when an operation unit (for example, a PUSH button 194 shown in FIG. 103 (B) or the like) that may be used for production is provided and the first display is displayed, the operation unit is operated. The third display is configured to be displayable, and when the first operation is performed in the first state, the display of the second display ends, and after the display of the second display ends. When the operation means is operated, the third display may be configured to be displayable.

  With such a configuration, the determination relating to the first determination can be executed without being influenced by the display state by an operation unit that may be used for production. In addition, since the operation means that may be used for production makes it possible to make a stable decision, it is possible to entertain the effect by focusing attention on the operation means for players who are not interested in the operation means. There are cases where it is possible. Further, an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  The operation means that may be used for production may be an operation means capable of adjusting the volume of a sound output means (for example, a speaker), or a light output means (for example, an LED, a lamp, a liquid crystal display device). It is also possible to use an operation means capable of adjusting the amount of light and adjusting the brightness.

  One of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, a screen indicating that the AT2 state is confirmed), and the fourth display is displayed from the state where the fourth display is displayed. It is configured to be able to shift to a state where one display is displayed, and when the first operation is performed in a state where the fourth display is displayed, the third display can be displayed. May be.

  With such a configuration, the determination regarding the first determination can be performed smoothly. It is also possible to provide a smooth determination method for players who are used to games. Further, an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  Further, the second display can be started in a state where the fourth display is displayed, and the first display is displayed after the fourth display is started. When the first operation is performed in a state in which the second display that has been displayed before being displayed is displayed, the third display may be configured to be displayable.

  With such a configuration, the determination regarding the first determination can be performed smoothly. It is also possible to provide a smooth determination method for players who are used to games. In addition, in a state where the first display can be displayed, a player who displays the second display without displaying the first display may not be interested in the determination regarding the first display. Such a player can be determined smoothly. Further, an operation unintended by the player can be prevented, and loss of the player's willingness to play can be prevented.

  In addition, a lottery means (for example, a winning combination internal lottery process (step S104) shown in FIG. 10) for performing lottery processing related to the internal winning of the combination and determining the lottery result is provided, and the combination is not related to the insertion of game media. Includes a re-gamer capable of performing a re-game and is configured to display both the first display and the second display in a state in which execution of the re-play cannot be started. In a state where the replay can be started, only the first display of the first display and the second display may be displayed.

  In addition, in the state where the execution of the replay can be started and the first display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured.

  Further, in a state where the execution of the replay can be started and the fourth display is displayed, the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed. It may be configured.

  In addition, one of the plural types of displays is a fifth display (for example, an interlocking effect shown in FIG. 64), and the fifth display is a display composed of a plurality of scenes. The display of the plurality of scenes includes a display of a first scene and a display of a second scene, and the display of the first scene includes the first display in a state where the first display is displayed. The display of the second scene is started when the first operation is performed in a state where the first display is not displayed. There may be a display in some cases.

  In addition, a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number (hereinafter referred to as “first game”; for example, a three-game bet game) and a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number (hereinafter referred to as “the first game”) , “Second game.” For example, the two-number betting game) can be executed, and the second number is different from the first number. The first game is more advantageous to the player, and the third display is not displayed even if the first operation is performed in the first state of the first game. In the first state in the second game, the third display may not be displayed even if the first operation is performed.

  With this configuration, the player can easily grasp whether the game is being played in the first game or the second game depending on whether or not the decision regarding the first decision is executed. In some cases, the first game may be more advantageous to the player than the second game.

  It should be noted that during the AT2 state (or AT1 state), an increase display of points (a display (title or item) corresponding to an internal point) may be performed according to a small role. Moreover, you may comprise so that the advantage in a judge state may change according to the value. In addition, based on the points accumulated by the player, it is possible to perform a hit effect in the final game such as the AT2 state, and to determine or notify the mode of the judge state.

  Further, in the case of the second game (two-game), it may be configured such that there is no increase in points or items. In addition, in a case where a specific scene is not displayed (skip) in the second game (two-game), it may be configured not to display (skip) a roaring effect.

  In addition, on a game console with a bonus design that requires a design to be avoided, operation navigation is performed in a state where it can be displayed (in a win-win state, when it is other than replay, it is out of play and is not necessarily drawn) May be. In addition, when the symbols are arranged, a predetermined effect display is repeatedly performed (for example, display of still images is continued), and even when the final game in the advantageous section is reached at that time, the number of acquired items, etc. The result may be displayed. Further, after the transition to the normal section (after the next game), the predetermined effect may be continued.

  In addition, the bonus game may be shifted to the default screen in the normal gaming state after the bonus is ended without shifting to the advantageous section during the bonus. Further, during the bonus, the game state may be shifted to a state in which only the second game (two betting games) is possible. In other words, in a gaming machine having a specification in which bonus symbols are gathered if symbols are not avoided, it may be configured such that only the second game (two betting games) is possible during the bonus. In addition, during the bonus, it may be configured such that a game with a difference of 0 between IN2 and OUT2 is performed for several tens of games, and the bonus ends when the payout exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 60). .

  Moreover, even if the value of the high navigation state counter is 19 games remaining during the bonus of the two-ply game, it may be configured not to shift to the LMT state. Moreover, although it does not transfer to a LMT state, it is good also as a structure which ED production starts (or ED production is not performed). Further, for example, when the bonus ends before the remaining number of games becomes 0, it may be possible to shift to the LMT state thereafter (or it may be surely shifted, or the transition is made) May be). In addition, even after the limiter reaches the low navigation state during the bonus, the second game (two-player game) is forced and the high navigation state is not changed during the game. Good.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the contents described in one configuration among the plurality of configurations described in the first to third embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further expand the game width.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a ball and ball game machine (pachinko machine), a revolving game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. it can.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Symbol display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 157 Effect image display apparatus 192 Four-way key 194 PUSH button 300 Main control part 400 1st sub control part 500 2nd sub control Part

Claims (2)

Operation means;
Control means for shifting to any one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display ;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to notify operation information of the operation means,
The advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as “operation navigation”),
The operation navigation is navigation about pushing order,
A first counter for said advantageous state;
Each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as “first count value”) can be updated.
When a certain termination condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift from the advantageous state to the normal state,
The certain end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value,
In the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous gaming states,
One advantageous gaming state of the plurality of advantageous gaming states is a first advantageous gaming state,
The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed,
A second counter for the first advantageous gaming state;
Each time one game is played in the first advantageous gaming state, the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as “second count value”) can be updated.
The second count value is configured to be updatable even in the case where a game that is not won in the push order in the first advantageous game state is performed,
A first game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the first number and a second game in which the number of bets on the game medium is the second number are configured to be executable,
The second number is a number different from the first number;
In the advantageous state, the first game is more advantageous to the player than the second game,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a display including an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as “first display”).
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display including an image representing an updated value of the certain value (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The certain value is a value related to the second count value;
When the execution of the first game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, both the first count value and the second count value are The count value is updated, and the second display can be displayed in the first game.
When the execution of the second game is started after the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state, the first count value and the second count value are Only the first count value is updated, and the second display is not displayed in the second game,
It is configured to be able to give a certain profit when a certain profit granting condition is satisfied,
The execution of the first game in the advantageous state is configured such that the certain profit granting condition can be established,
The execution of the second game in the advantageous state is configured such that the certain profit granting condition is not satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that. Operation means;
A gaming state setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of states including a normal state and an advantageous state;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
Notification means capable of notifying operation information of the operation means;
A game machine equipped with
Advantageous gaming state control means capable of executing control relating to the advantageous state;
A plurality of counters including a first counter for said advantageous state and a second counter;
A bet number setting means capable of setting any bet number among a plurality of bet numbers including a first bet number and a second bet number less than the first bet number in order to start one game. When,
Profit granting means capable of granting a certain profit when a certain profit granting condition is satisfied;
With
The advantageous state is a state more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information (hereinafter referred to as “operation navigation”),
The operation navigation is navigation about pushing order,
In the advantageous state, the game with the first bet number (hereinafter referred to as “first game”) is more than the game with the second bet number (hereinafter referred to as “second game”). Game that is advantageous to the user,
The advantageous gaming state control means, said each time 1 game in an advantageous state is performed, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter, "first count value" hereinafter.) Feasible means to control for updating the And
The gaming state setting means is means capable of setting the normal state by ending the setting of the advantageous state when a certain end condition is satisfied,
The certain end condition is a condition that can be satisfied when the first count value becomes a specific value,
The advantageous gaming state control means includes:
In the advantageous state, it is possible to execute control for setting any advantageous gaming state among a plurality of advantageous gaming states including the first advantageous gaming state;
A means capable of executing control to update a count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as “second count value”) each time one game is performed in the first advantageous gaming state;
The first advantageous gaming state is an advantageous gaming state in which the operation navigation can be executed,
The second count value is configured to be updatable even in the case where a game that is not won in the push order in the first advantageous game state is performed,
The display means includes a display including an image indicating a certain value (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) as one of the plurality of types of display, and a value after the certain value is updated. Is a means capable of displaying a display including an image (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The certain value is a value related to the second count value;
After the first display is displayed in the first advantageous gaming state,
When the execution of the first game is started, both the first count value and the second count value are updated by the advantageous gaming state control means, and in the first game The second display can be displayed by the display means,
When the execution of the second game is started, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value is updated by the advantageous gaming state control means, In the second game, the second display is not displayed by the display means,
The execution of the first game in the advantageous state is configured such that the certain profit granting condition can be established,
The execution of the second game in the advantageous state is configured such that the certain profit granting condition is not satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.